WO2022061733A1 - Wireless communication method and device - Google Patents

Wireless communication method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022061733A1
WO2022061733A1 PCT/CN2020/117812 CN2020117812W WO2022061733A1 WO 2022061733 A1 WO2022061733 A1 WO 2022061733A1 CN 2020117812 W CN2020117812 W CN 2020117812W WO 2022061733 A1 WO2022061733 A1 WO 2022061733A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
srs
group
signaling
cell group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/117812
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
史志华
田杰娇
陈文洪
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/117812 priority Critical patent/WO2022061733A1/en
Priority to CN202080102898.7A priority patent/CN115804204A/en
Publication of WO2022061733A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022061733A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and more particularly, to wireless communication methods and devices.
  • the network device can trigger the terminal device to transmit aperiodic SRS through aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can only trigger the transmission of the aperiodic SRS on the uplink corresponding to the cell X.
  • this triggering method has many limitations for scenarios with multiple cells. For example, a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario.
  • Carrier Aggregation, CA Carrier Aggregation
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device, which can realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • the target cell group is determined based on the first indication information, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group.
  • a wireless communication method including:
  • a terminal device for executing the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a network device for executing the method in the second aspect or each of its implementations.
  • the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a terminal device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used for storing a computer program
  • the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a chip for implementing any one of the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect or the method in each implementation manner thereof.
  • the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or each of its implementations method in .
  • a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program causes a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
  • a computer program product comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or the implementations thereof.
  • a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or the respective implementations thereof.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on the active cell in the target cell group, in other words, the multi-cell target can be realized. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in scenarios.
  • FIG. 1 is an example of a system framework provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic interaction diagram of a wireless communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3 to 16 are schematic diagrams of third indication information provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 .
  • the network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through the air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
  • the embodiment of the present application only uses the communication system 100 for exemplary description, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, LTE time division duplex (Time Division Duplex, TDD), universal mobile communication system (Universal mobile communication system) Mobile Telecommunication System, UMTS), 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system), or future communication systems, etc.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • Universal mobile communication system Universal mobile communication system
  • Mobile Telecommunication System Universal mobile communication system
  • UMTS Universal mobile communication system
  • 5G communication system also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system
  • future communication systems etc.
  • the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 .
  • An access network device may provide communication coverage for a particular geographic area, and may communicate with terminal devices 110 (eg, UEs) located within the coverage area.
  • the network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a next generation radio access network (Next Generation Radio Access Network, NG RAN) device, Or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, which includes, but is not limited to, a terminal device that adopts a wired or wireless connection with the network device 120 or other terminal devices.
  • the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, end devices in 5G networks or end devices in future evolved networks, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the terminal device 110 may be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
  • D2D Device to Device
  • the wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station, and the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, an Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function). , AMF), another example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), another example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), another example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF).
  • the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of an LTE network, for example, a session management function+core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) Equipment.
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • the SMF+PGW-C can simultaneously implement the functions that the SMF and the PGW-C can implement.
  • the above-mentioned core network equipment may also be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing the functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
  • NG next generation network
  • the terminal equipment establishes an air interface connection with the access network equipment through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal equipment can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (N3 for short); the access network equipment can establish a control plane signaling with the AMF through the NG interface 2 (N2 for short).
  • gNB next generation wireless access base station
  • UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (N11 for short)
  • the SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through the NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows one base station, one core network device and two terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and the coverage area of each base station may include other numbers of terminals equipment, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a device having a communication function in the network/system can be referred to as a communication device.
  • the communication device may include a network device 120 and a terminal device 110 with a communication function, and the network device 120 and the terminal device 110 may be the devices described above, which will not be repeated here;
  • the communication device may further include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method, which can be used to determine a time slot for sending an SRS.
  • the Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) signal is an important reference signal in the 5G/NR system and is widely used in various functions in the NR system.
  • the SRS can be used in the following scenarios:
  • Non-Codebook based 7. Cooperate with the uplink transmission based on non-codebook (Non-Codebook based).
  • a network device can configure one or more SRS resource groups (SRS Resource sets) for a terminal device, and each SRS Resource set can configure one or more SRS resources (SRS resources).
  • SRS Resource sets SRS resource groups
  • SRS resources SRS resources
  • the transmission of the SRS can be divided into periodic (Periodic), semi-persistent (Semi-persistent), and aperiodic (Aperiodic).
  • Periodic SRS refers to periodically transmitted SRS, and its period and time slot offset are configured by RRC signaling. Once the terminal device receives the corresponding configuration parameters, it will send SRS according to a certain period until the RRC configuration is invalid.
  • the spatial correlation information (Spatial Relation Info) of the periodic SRS is also configured by RRC signaling.
  • the spatial correlation information may indicate a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block, SSB) or a reference SRS.
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • SSB Synchrononization Signal/PBCH Block
  • the transmission beam of the periodic SRS may be indicated in an implicit manner.
  • the terminal device determines the transmission beam of the periodic SRS according to the indicated CSI-RS/SSB.
  • the terminal device may determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource through the spatial correlation information of the SRS resource.
  • the period and slot offset of semi-persistent SRS are configured by RRC signaling, but its activation and deactivation signaling is carried by MAC CE.
  • the terminal device starts to transmit SRS after receiving the activation signaling until it receives the deactivation signaling.
  • the spatially related information (transmission beam) of the semi-persistent SRS is carried along with the MAC CE that activates the SRS.
  • the terminal equipment After receiving the period and time slot offset configured by RRC, the terminal equipment determines the time slot that can be used to transmit SRS according to the following formula:
  • T SRS and T offset are the configured period and offset
  • n f are the radio frame and time slot numbers, respectively.
  • Aperiodic SRS transmission means that the network device can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device through DCI.
  • the trigger signaling for triggering aperiodic SRS transmission can be either through the DCI bearer for scheduling PUSCH/PDSCH in the UE-specific search space or the common search space (Common search space), or through the DCI format 2_3 in the common search space. bear.
  • DCI format 2_3 can not only be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission, but also can be used to configure a power control command (TPC) command of SRS on a group of UEs or a group of carriers at the same time.
  • TPC power control command
  • the trigger signaling of the SRS indicates that the SRS resource group with the higher layer parameter aperiodic SRS resource trigger (aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger) set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
  • aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger aperiodic SRS resource trigger set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
  • the terminal device After receiving the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (eg DCI), the terminal device performs SRS transmission on the aperiodic SRS resource group indicated by the trigger signaling.
  • the time slot offset (slot offset) between the trigger signaling and the SRS transmission may be configured by higher layer signaling (RRC).
  • RRC higher layer signaling
  • the network device pre-instructs the terminal device configuration parameters of each SRS resource group through high-level signaling, including time-frequency resources, sequence parameters, power control parameters, and the like.
  • the terminal device can also determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the resource through the spatial correlation information of the resource, and the spatial correlation information can be configured for each SRS through RRC resource.
  • the uplink and downlink resources can be transmitted through high-level signaling and physical layer signaling. to indicate and adjust. Therefore, some symbols in a slot or a slot may be used for transmission in different directions at different times, for example, a certain time can be used for uplink transmission, and a certain time can be used for downlink transmission.
  • slot offset can be configured by high-level signaling, which is equivalent to before the RRC signaling reconfigures other values.
  • the time slot offset between each trigger signaling and SRS transmission is constant, resulting in a fixed relative position between the time slot used to receive the trigger signaling and the time slot used to send the SRS, which increases the restriction and Reduced system flexibility.
  • the time slot offset is k
  • the SRS is to be triggered to transmit on slot n+k
  • the corresponding trigger signaling can only be sent on slot n, which limits the timing of sending trigger signaling, and gives the network device
  • the scheduling of jobs adds additional unnecessary constraints.
  • a certain aperiodic SRS may not be transmitted. For example, if slot n+k is changed to be used for downlink transmission, the trigger SRS signaling sent on slot n is invalid, or the trigger signaling cannot be sent on slot n.
  • the terminal device can transmit SRS on slot n+k or the first valid slot after that.
  • SRS SRS on slot n+k or the first effective slot after that.
  • the effective slot is not It is fixed and needs to be determined according to related configurations or factors (eg, uplink and downlink time slot configuration and/or indication).
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method.
  • a time slot that can or can be used to transmit an SRS is referred to as a valid time slot (valid slot).
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 200 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device.
  • the terminal device shown in FIG. 2 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1
  • the network device shown in FIG. 2 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the method 200 may include:
  • S220 Determine a target cell set (Cell Set) based on the first indication information, where the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger SRS on active cells in the target cell set.
  • the terminal device determines a target cell group in at least one cell group according to the first indication information.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on the active cell in the target cell group. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS (or across carriers) or multi-cell (or multi-carrier).
  • the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling may be transmitted through one of downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2, or, also Can be transmitted by doing DCI format 2_3.
  • different trigger states may correspond to different cell groups.
  • the target cell group is a cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first trigger state may be a non-zero trigger state.
  • the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
  • the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling may be sent to the terminal device as one signaling or carried in the same signaling.
  • the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
  • BWP indicator Bitwidth part indicator
  • Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain
  • the transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
  • SRS resource indicator SRS resource indicator
  • the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility.
  • the number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network.
  • the number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • part or all of the bits in the first field are used to carry the first indication information, which is equivalent to multiplexing the bits of the first field to carry the first indication information, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
  • the bits in the first field are exclusively used to carry the first indication information.
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
  • whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
  • the terminal device determines whether the first domain exists in the terminal device through the first RRC signaling. For example, in the presence of the first domain, the terminal device may acquire the first indication information in the first domain. For example, in the case where the first domain does not exist, the terminal device may determine the target cell group through the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the method 200 may further include:
  • Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the network device to determine the manner in which the terminal device triggers the SRS.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to activate the function of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the second indication information is carried by the second RRC signaling.
  • the method 200 may further include:
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  • the terminal device sends the capability information to the network device to indicate that the terminal device supports a function of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  • the triggering of the SRS on the cell based on the cell group involved in this application means that the same aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group, or can trigger the SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group.
  • SRS transmission on all active cells may be used to instruct the terminal device to activate the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling to trigger the triggering method of SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group, or the second indication information may be used to indicate A triggering method in which the terminal device activates the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling to trigger SRS transmission on all active cells in the corresponding cell group.
  • the capability information can be used to indicate whether the terminal device has the capability of triggering SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group by the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, or the capability information can be used to indicate whether the terminal device has the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling capability to trigger SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group.
  • An aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can trigger the capability of SRS transmission on all active cells in the corresponding cell group.
  • the method 200 may further include:
  • Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
  • the terminal device receives the third indication information sent by the network device, so that the terminal device determines the target cell group in the at least one cell group after receiving the first indication information.
  • the terminal device determines a target cell group in the at least one cell group according to the first indication information.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group. Equivalently, for different cells, or for different BWPs of a cell, at least one cell group configured therein may be different. Thereby, the flexibility of configuration can be improved, thereby improving the optimization performance of the network device.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state
  • the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the third indication information is configured for a trigger state, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group.
  • different trigger states may correspond to different cell groups. Equivalently, two different trigger states may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cells in different cell groups.
  • the trigger state corresponding to a certain cell group in the at least one cell group may be the first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • trigger state 1 may correspond to aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0 and cell 1, that is, trigger state 1 may be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on active cells in cell 0 and cell 1.
  • trigger state 2 may correspond to aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0, cell 1 and cell 3, that is, trigger state 2 may be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on active cells in cell 0, cell 1 and cell 3.
  • the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a terminal device.
  • the third indication information is configured for the trigger state of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to each cell of the terminal device, or to each BWP of each cell of the terminal device.
  • the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a first cell group (Cell group) of the terminal device.
  • the third indication information is configured for a trigger state on a first cell group of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to each cell of the one first cell group, or to each BWP of each cell of the one first cell group.
  • the first cell group may refer to a cell group under a dual connection (Dual Connection, DC).
  • a dual connection for example, a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell group), or a secondary cell group (SCG, Secondary Cell group).
  • MCG Master Cell group
  • SCG Secondary Cell group
  • both a cell group and a target cell group in the at least one cell group involved in this application may be understood as a cell group formed by one or more cells that can be triggered by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for one cell of the terminal device.
  • the third indication information is configured for the trigger state on one cell of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to the one cell, or applicable to each BWP of the one cell.
  • the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for one BWP of one cell of the terminal device.
  • the third indication information is configured for the trigger state on one BWP of one cell of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to the one BWP of the one cell.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
  • the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group. Equivalently, for different cells or different cells in the same cell group, the configured at least one cell group may be the same. Therefore, the network device and the terminal device are simple to implement and process, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
  • the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
  • the above-mentioned first RRC signaling, the above-mentioned second RRC signaling, and the above-mentioned third RRC signaling are carried in the same signaling.
  • the above-mentioned first RRC signaling, the above-mentioned second RRC signaling, and the above-mentioned third RRC signaling are the same RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • cell identifier involved in this application may also be referred to as a cell number, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and a bit on one bit in the one bit group The value is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
  • the MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following:
  • the solution that the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap is exemplarily described.
  • the MAC CE signaling may include a serving cell ID (Serving Cell ID) and a bitmap of T cell groups, wherein the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 8. That is, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 7 . If the number of cells configured by the terminal is less than 8, some bits in the bitmap are inactive, or the terminal may ignore some bits in the bitmap, or some bits in the bitmap may be reserved bits. In other words, if the number of bits available for the bitmap in the aforementioned MAC CE signaling is X, and the actual maximum value of ServCellIndex is less than X, then some of the X bits can be used as reserved bits.
  • the reserved bits may not be used for practical purposes.
  • the X bits may include the reserved bits other than the bitmap for indicating the first cell group.
  • the reserved bits may also be referred to as remaining bits. It should be understood that similar processes in other embodiments are not repeated to avoid repetition.
  • the serving cell identity may be the identity of the first cell described above.
  • the serving cell identity can be used to indicate which cell the MAC CE described above is used for (indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies).
  • the serving cell identifier may occupy 5 bits.
  • C 0 to C 7 are respectively the bits corresponding to the identifiers of the cells in each of the above-mentioned at least one cell group.
  • C 0 to C 7 respectively correspond to 8 cells.
  • C i in C 0 to C 7 corresponds to a cell whose serving cell index (ServCellIndex) is i. If the value of C i is 1, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i belongs to the corresponding cell group; if the value of C i is 1 If it is 0, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i does not belong to the corresponding cell group.
  • C i if the value of C i is 0, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i belongs to the corresponding cell group; if the value of C i is 1, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i does not belong to the corresponding cell group. community group.
  • a bit that is not marked or described may be R, where R represents a reserved bit (reserved bit), for example, its value may be 0.
  • FIG. 3 is only an example of the present application, and should not be construed as a limitation of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 The modified structure of FIG. 3 will be schematically described below with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7 .
  • the MAC CE signaling may also include X2, X1, and X0.
  • bits in X2, X1, and X0 are used to indicate the number T of cell groups.
  • bits in X2, X1, and X0 may be used to carry the above-mentioned first information.
  • the MAC CE signaling may also include a bandwidth part identifier (Bandwidth Part ID, BWP ID).
  • BWP ID bandwidth part identifier
  • the MAC CE signaling may include the BWP ID.
  • the BWP ID may be the identifier of the first BWP described above, that is, the identifier of the first BWP on the first cell.
  • the BWP ID can be used to indicate which BWP this MAC CE applies to (indicates a DL BWP for which the MAC CE applies).
  • the BWP ID may occupy 2 bits.
  • the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 24.
  • bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 23 .
  • the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 32.
  • bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 31 .
  • FIG. 3 to FIG. 7 are only examples of the present application, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
  • the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling can be changed from the left-to-right arrangement order to the right-to-left arrangement order.
  • the present application does not specifically limit the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling may also include other information.
  • the position of each piece of information in the MAC CE signaling can be changed, for example, R can be placed at the end of the first line, or can be placed in front of the first line.
  • the format of the MAC CE signaling may be determined based on the maximum value of the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) configured by the terminal device.
  • ServCellIndex serving cell index
  • the network device may determine or switch the length of the at least one bit through RRC signaling, that is, determine or switch the format of the MAC CE signaling. For example, if the maximum value of ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is less than 8, a MAC CE with a bitmap length of 8 bits can be used; if the maximum value of ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is greater than or equal to 8 and less than 16, the bitmap can be used The length of the picture is the MAC CE of 16 bits; if the maximum value of the ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is greater than or equal to 16 and less than 24, the MAC CE with the length of the bitmap of 24 bits can be used; if the maximum value of the ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is If the value is greater than or equal to 24, the MAC CE with a length of 32 bits of the bitmap can be used.
  • the division granularity of the length of the bitmap can also be greater than 8.
  • a MAC CE with a bitmap length of 16 bits or 32 bits can be used.
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following:
  • first information used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group
  • one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
  • third information one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs;
  • the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
  • the MAC CE signaling may include serving cell IDs (Serving Cell IDs) 0 to K, and X2, X1, X0 or X2 corresponding to each of the serving cell IDs 1 to K, and X2, X1, X0 or X2, Some bits in X1, X0.
  • serving cell IDs Serving Cell IDs
  • X2, X1, X0 or X2 corresponding to each of the serving cell IDs 1 to K
  • X2, X1, X0 or X2 Some bits in X1, X0.
  • the serving cell identifier 0 represents the identifier of the first cell described above.
  • serving cell identity 0 may be used to indicate which cell the MAC CE signaling described above is used for (indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies).
  • the serving cell identifier 0 may occupy 5 bits.
  • the serving cell identifiers 1 to K represent the identifiers of the cells in the second cell group described above.
  • the serving cell identifier i may be used to indicate a serving cell index i (ServCellIndex i).
  • the serving cell identifier i may occupy 5 bits.
  • bits in the X2, X1, and X0 are used to indicate the cell group to which the cell indicated by the corresponding serving cell identifier belongs. In other words, some or all of the bits in the X2, X1, and X0 may be used to carry the third information described above.
  • FIG. 13 is only an example of the present application, and should not be construed as a limitation of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 The modified structure of FIG. 13 will be exemplarily described below with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 .
  • the X 1_2 , X 1_1 , X 1_0 ⁇ XT_2 , X T_1 , and X T_0 may be used to carry the above-mentioned second information.
  • the third information in the MAC CE signaling can be replaced with the second information.
  • X2, X1, X0 corresponding to each serving cell identifier in the serving cell identifiers 1 to K can be replaced with the X5, X4 , X3 , X2, X1, X0 , some or all of the bits in the X 5 , X 4 , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , and X 0 are used for indicating pairs to indicate how many cells each cell group contains.
  • the number of cells included in one cell group in the at least one cell group may be indicated by one piece of the second information. That is, at least one of the second pieces of information respectively indicates the number of cells in the at least one cell group.
  • the number of cells included in each cell group in the at least one cell group may be indicated by one piece of the second information.
  • the MAC CE signaling shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 10 includes the identifier of the first cell described above, and the third indication information is configured for a terminal device or a cell group including the first cell
  • the MAC CE signaling may not include the identity of the first cell or the identity of the first BWP, and of course, the identity of the first cell and the identity of the first BWP may not be included at the same time. logo.
  • the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 7 for each cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 23 for each cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 31 for each cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling only includes serving cell identifiers 1 to K, and X2, X1, and X0 corresponding to each serving cell identifier in the serving cell identifiers 1 to K.
  • the MAC CE signaling only includes serving cell identifiers 1 to K, and X 5 , X 4 , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , X 0 , the X 5 , X 4 Part or all of the bits in , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , and X 0 are used for indicating pairs to indicate how many cells each cell group contains.
  • FIGS. 11 to 16 are only examples, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
  • the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling can be changed from the left-to-right arrangement order to the right-to-left arrangement order.
  • the present application does not specifically limit the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling may also include other information.
  • the position of each piece of information in the MAC CE signaling can be changed, for example, R can be placed at the end of the first line, or can be placed in front of the first line.
  • the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the method 200 may further include:
  • Fourth RRC signaling is received, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth RRC signaling sent by the network device.
  • the network device sends the fourth RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the cells in the first cell and the target cell group.
  • SRS transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource).
  • the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource.
  • the slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource.
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS.
  • the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • SRS-PosResource-r16 RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the SRS resource groups of the different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in the different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS -Resource signaling configuration.
  • the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
  • the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is from 1 to N-1 the integer.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is an activated timeslot offset among the multiple timeslot offsets shift.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
  • a third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger
  • the time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the number of timeslot offsets already in the multiple timeslot offsets. Active slot offset.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission.
  • the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols.
  • the time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission.
  • whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
  • the steps are mainly used to describe relatively related function points. In actual implementation, some steps may be omitted, or the relative order of different steps may be changed, or the relative order of different sub-processes in different steps may be Changes are not limited here.
  • the SRS resource group refers to an aperiodic SRS resource group; the SRS resource refers to an aperiodic SRS resource.
  • the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
  • the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
  • beamManagement beam management
  • codebook codebook
  • nonCodebook non-codebook
  • antenna switching antenna switching
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • the above multiple trigger states are configured by aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, wherein aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
  • aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device can determine N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
  • the network device For the cell Z, or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates the T group of cells through the third indication information.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells in a group.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device receives the first indication information, it may be determined by the second indication information that the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information includes at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells.
  • the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the number T of cell groups is determined according to network RRC signaling.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the third indication information can be transmitted through MAC CE signaling.
  • the configuration of MAC CE signaling is more flexible, and the modification delay is lower, which can provide greater flexibility for the system. .
  • the number T of the cell groups is determined according to the RRC signaling sent by the network.
  • the number of cell groups T is determined according to the MAC CE signaling sent by the network.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • the terminal in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI (any active cell is denoted as Z'), and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additional interpretation. bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
  • the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
  • Option 2 The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
  • the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
  • BWP indicator Bitwidth part indicator
  • Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain
  • the transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
  • SRS resource indicator SRS resource indicator
  • the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility.
  • the number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network.
  • the number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t.
  • the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization.
  • option 2 more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists is determined according to network RRC signaling.
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
  • the terminal device may send the aperiodic SRS on one or more cells according to the first signaling.
  • the terminal device may send the corresponding aperiodic SRS on an active cell in one or more cells in the cell group t, wherein any active cell is denoted as Z'.
  • Aperiodic SRS transmissions that only trigger other cells can be implemented, which can provide greater flexibility to the network.
  • the terminal device can send the corresponding aperiodic SRS on the active cell in the cell Z and one or more cells in the cell group t, wherein any active cell is denoted as Z', which can include the cell Z in the active cell.
  • Z' any active cell is denoted as Z', which can include the cell Z in the active cell.
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value is sent. Since the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' is configured with a trigger state, therefore There is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'.
  • the corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated).
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
  • slot n can be determined using the following formula:
  • the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS
  • the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling
  • the k represents the corresponding SRS resource group. slot offset, where n represents the first slot.
  • slot n’ can be determined based on the following formula:
  • the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS
  • the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling
  • the and the u offset, PDCCH respectively depends on the time slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for receiving the physical downlink control channel PDCCH and u offset
  • the and the u offset, the SRS respectively depends on the slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for transmitting the SRS and u offset
  • k represents the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group
  • n represents the first slot.
  • u offset may be the relevant parameters of the slot offset for CA specified in the communication standard.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the third indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
  • Step 1 The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 2 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • different non-zero aperiodic SRS triggering states may correspond to different groups of cells in the T groups of cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells of a group.
  • the network device For cell Z or the BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or the BWP Y of cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells .
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the BWP Y of cell Z or cell Z corresponds to the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S
  • some of the cell groups corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S in the T group of cells are triggered Or SRS on all cells.
  • the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
  • corresponding different cell groups may be configured for different aperiodic SRS triggering states.
  • the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the second indication information may be used to determine whether the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells.
  • the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the number T of cell groups is determined through network RRC signaling.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
  • the RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
  • the number T of the cell groups is determined according to the RRC signaling sent by the network.
  • the number of cell groups T is determined according to the MAC CE signaling sent by the network.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • the terminal in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI (any active cell is denoted as Z'), and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additional interpretation. bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
  • the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
  • Option 2 The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
  • the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
  • BWP indicator Bitwidth part indicator
  • Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain
  • the transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
  • SRS resource indicator SRS resource indicator
  • the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility.
  • the number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network.
  • the number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t.
  • the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization.
  • option 2 more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists is determined according to network RRC signaling.
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
  • Step 3 It should be understood that, for Step 3 in Embodiment 2, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 1, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell.
  • Step 1 The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 3 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the network device For the terminal device, or for the first cell group of the terminal device, the network device indicates the cells of the T group through the third indication information.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells in a group.
  • the cell Z may be any cell on the terminal device or any cell in the first cell group.
  • the T group of cells are indicated by signaling, and a certain cell group (denoted as Q) can be further indicated by DCI, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z can trigger the cells of cell group Q.
  • Aperiodic SRS transmission on the network so that the network can obtain greater flexibility and optimization space, and improve system performance.
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z.
  • the original triggering method is used.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device receives the first indication information, it may be determined by the second indication information that the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells.
  • the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
  • each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
  • the number T of cell groups is determined according to network RRC signaling.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
  • the third RRC signaling is through CellGroupConfig.
  • the third indication information can be transmitted through MAC CE signaling.
  • the configuration of MAC CE signaling is more flexible, and the modification delay is lower, which can provide greater flexibility for the system. .
  • the number T of cell groups is determined according to the network through RRC signaling.
  • the number of cell groups T is determined according to the network through MAC CE signaling.
  • the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on any cell or any cell in the first cell group, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (whichever The value is denoted as value, referred to as the first value for short), that is, in a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling referred to as the first signaling
  • the terminal in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling.
  • the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI, and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused, and there is no need to add new bits, or to additionally interpret the bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
  • the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups.
  • the non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
  • Option 2 The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
  • the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
  • BWP indicator Bitwidth part indicator
  • Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain
  • the transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
  • SRS resource indicator SRS resource indicator
  • the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility.
  • the number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity.
  • the number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network.
  • the number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
  • the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t.
  • the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization.
  • option 2 more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
  • the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
  • the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists or not is configured by network RRC signaling.
  • the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
  • Step 3 It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 3, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 1, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the solution in which the first indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group has been described above with reference to Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3.
  • the following describes the first indication information used to trigger the SRS resource in combination with Embodiment 4 to Embodiment 6.
  • the corresponding SRS is described.
  • the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
  • step 1
  • the terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • cell aggregation Carrier Aggregation, CA
  • a cells are configured therein.
  • the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources.
  • the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
  • each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point.
  • multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
  • the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
  • N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
  • the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used.
  • the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
  • the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
  • aperiodic SRS trigger states Maximum number of SRS trigger states
  • the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config
  • Step 2 It should be understood that, for Step 2 in Embodiment 4, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
  • aperiodic SRS trigger signaling referred to as the first signaling
  • the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state
  • the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling may be sent, including the cell Z.
  • a trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value.
  • the corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
  • the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource.
  • SRS trigger signaling such as DCI
  • time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated
  • SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
  • the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling
  • the time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets)
  • the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'.
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
  • the third indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
  • Step 1 The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 5 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • Step 2 It should be understood that, for Step 2 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 2. In order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • Step 3 It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell.
  • Step 1 The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
  • step 1 in Embodiment 5 reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • Step 2 It should be understood that for Step 2 in Embodiment 6, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • Step 3 It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 6, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 300 may include:
  • the receiving unit 310 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine a target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the target cell group SRS on the active cell.
  • the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
  • the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
  • whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
  • the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the second indication information is carried through second RRC signaling.
  • the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  • the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state
  • the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
  • the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the one bit group The value of one bit in is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
  • the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
  • first information used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group
  • one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
  • third information one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs;
  • the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
  • the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • Fourth RRC signaling is received, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
  • the SRS resource groups of the different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in the different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS -Resource signaling configuration.
  • the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offsets Active slot offset in .
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
  • a third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger
  • the time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offset k' Activated slot offsets in slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 300 shown in FIG. 17 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 300 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 400 may include:
  • the sending unit 410 is configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine a target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the target cell group SRS on the active cell.
  • the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  • the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
  • the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  • the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
  • the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
  • whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • Send second indication information where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  • the second indication information is carried through second RRC signaling.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • Send third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state
  • the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  • the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  • the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group
  • the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
  • the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
  • the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
  • the bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
  • the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  • the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the one bit group The value of one bit in is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
  • the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
  • the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
  • the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
  • the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
  • first information used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group
  • one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
  • third information one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs;
  • the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
  • the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • Send fourth RRC signaling where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS-Resource Signaling configuration.
  • the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
  • the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • the second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offsets Active slot offset in .
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  • the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot
  • the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  • the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
  • the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  • the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
  • the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
  • a third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger
  • the time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
  • the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets
  • the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offset k' Activated slot offsets in slot offsets.
  • the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset
  • the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  • the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
  • the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments.
  • the network device 400 shown in FIG. 18 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the network device 400 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
  • the steps of the method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor and/or instructions in the form of software, and the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as hardware
  • the execution of the decoding processor is completed, or the execution is completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps in the above method embodiments in combination with its hardware.
  • the receiving unit or the transmitting unit referred to above may be implemented by a transceiver.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may include a processor 510 .
  • the processor 510 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may further include a memory 520 .
  • the memory 520 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions, etc. executed by the processor 510 .
  • the processor 510 may call and run a computer program from the memory 520 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 520 may be a separate device independent of the processor 510 , or may be integrated in the processor 510 .
  • the communication device 500 may further include a transceiver 530 .
  • the processor 510 may control the transceiver 530 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices.
  • Transceiver 530 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 530 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
  • each component in the communication device 500 is connected through a bus system, wherein the bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • the communication device 500 may be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device 400 or the terminal device 600 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application, which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the communication device 500 may be the network device of the embodiments of the present application, and the communication device 500 may implement corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the network device 500 or the network device 700 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application. This will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip.
  • the chip may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability, and can implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip may also be referred to as a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip, or the like.
  • the chip can be applied to various communication devices, so that the communication device installed with the chip can execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 600 includes a processor 610 .
  • the processor 610 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip 600 may further include a memory 620 .
  • the processor 610 may call and run a computer program from the memory 620 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 620 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions and the like executed by the processor 610 .
  • the memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610 , or may be integrated in the processor 610 .
  • the chip 600 may further include an input interface 630 .
  • the processor 610 may control the input interface 630 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may acquire information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 600 may further include an output interface 640 .
  • the processor 610 can control the output interface 640 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, can output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip 600 can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application, and can also implement the various methods in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in FIG. 1 is not repeated here.
  • bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • the processors referred to above may include, but are not limited to:
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the processor may be used to implement or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory mentioned above includes but is not limited to:
  • Non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • RAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by a portable electronic device including a plurality of application programs, enable the portable electronic device to perform the implementation shown in method 200 example method.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. , and are not repeated here for brevity.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including a computer program.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. Repeat.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • a computer program is also provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can execute the method of the embodiment shown in method 200 .
  • the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity. , and will not be repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • a communication system which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity.
  • system and the like in this document may also be referred to as “network management architecture” or “network system” and the like.
  • a software functional unit If implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that make contributions to the prior art or the parts of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
  • division of units, modules or components in the apparatus embodiments described above is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
  • multiple units, modules or components may be combined or integrated.
  • To another system, or some units or modules or components can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the above-mentioned units/modules/components described as separate/display components may or may not be physically separated, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units/modules/components may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the embodiments of the present application.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device. The method comprises: receiving first indication information; and determining a target cell group on the basis of the first indication information, wherein aperiodic sounding reference signal (SRS) trigger signaling on a first cell is used for triggering an SRS on an active cell in the target cell group. The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell can trigger SRS transmission of a terminal device on the active cell in the target cell group by means of the first indication information, in other words, cross-cell (or cross-carrier) trigger and transmission of the aperiodic SRS in a multi-cell scenario can be achieved.

Description

无线通信方法和设备Wireless communication method and device 技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及无线通信方法和设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and more particularly, to wireless communication methods and devices.
背景技术Background technique
在新空口(New Radio,NR)系统中,网络设备可以通过非周期SRS触发信令触发终端设备的传输非周期SRS。In a New Radio (New Radio, NR) system, the network device can trigger the terminal device to transmit aperiodic SRS through aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
但是,如果非周期SRS触发信令在小区X上发送,则非周期SRS触发信令只能触发小区X对应上行链路上的传输非周期SRS。但是,这种触发方式针对多小区的场景有很多局限性。例如,载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景。However, if the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is sent on the cell X, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can only trigger the transmission of the aperiodic SRS on the uplink corresponding to the cell X. However, this triggering method has many limitations for scenarios with multiple cells. For example, a carrier aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) scenario.
因此,如何实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)非周期SRS的触发传输是本领域急需解决的技术问题。发明内容Therefore, how to realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently in the art. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供一种无线通信方法和设备,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。The embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device, which can realize the triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in a multi-cell scenario.
第一方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a first aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
接收第一指示信息;receiving first indication information;
基于所述第一指示信息确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。The target cell group is determined based on the first indication information, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group.
第二方面,提供了一种无线通信方法,包括:In a second aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, including:
发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。Sending first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine the target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group .
第三方面,提供了一种终端设备,用于执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述终端设备包括用于执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In a third aspect, a terminal device is provided for executing the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof. Specifically, the terminal device includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第四方面,提供了一种网络设备,用于执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述网络设备包括用于执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法的功能模块。In a fourth aspect, a network device is provided for executing the method in the second aspect or each of its implementations. Specifically, the network device includes a functional module for executing the method in the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第五方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned first aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第六方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行上述第二方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, a network device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program stored in the memory, so as to execute the method in the above-mentioned second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第七方面,提供了一种芯片,用于实现上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。具体地,所述芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a chip is provided for implementing any one of the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect or the method in each implementation manner thereof. Specifically, the chip includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or each of its implementations method in .
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided for storing a computer program, and the computer program causes a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first aspect to the second aspect or each implementation manner thereof.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, comprising computer program instructions, the computer program instructions causing a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or the implementations thereof.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中的任一方面或其各实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, there is provided a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to second aspects or the respective implementations thereof.
基于以上技术方案,通过所述第一指示信息,使得第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,可触发终端设备在目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS传输,换言之,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。Based on the above technical solutions, through the first indication information, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on the active cell in the target cell group, in other words, the multi-cell target can be realized. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS across cells (or across carriers) in scenarios.
此外,避免了为每个小区仅通过自己接收的非周期SRS触发信令触发SRS,不仅能够提高触发信令的灵活性,还能够降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的资源消耗。In addition, it is avoided to trigger the SRS for each cell only through the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling received by itself, which can not only improve the flexibility of the trigger signaling, but also reduce the resource consumption of the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI).
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的系统框架的示例。FIG. 1 is an example of a system framework provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例提供的无线通信方法的示意性交互图。FIG. 2 is a schematic interaction diagram of a wireless communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图3至图16是本申请实施例提供的第三指示信息的示意性图。3 to 16 are schematic diagrams of third indication information provided by embodiments of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示意性框图。FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的示意性框图FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application
图19是本申请实施例提供的通信设备的示意性框图。FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图20是本申请实施例提供的芯片的示意性框图。FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present application.
图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,通信系统100可以包括终端设备110和网络设备120。网络设备120可以通过空口与终端设备110通信。终端设备110和网络设备120之间支持多业务传输。As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 . The network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through the air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
应理解,本申请实施例仅以通信系统100进行示例性说明,但本申请实施例不限定于此。也就是说,本申请实施 例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、5G通信系统(也称为新无线(New Radio,NR)通信系统),或未来的通信系统等。It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application only uses the communication system 100 for exemplary description, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, LTE time division duplex (Time Division Duplex, TDD), universal mobile communication system (Universal mobile communication system) Mobile Telecommunication System, UMTS), 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (New Radio, NR) communication system), or future communication systems, etc.
在图1所示的通信系统100中,网络设备120可以是与终端设备110通信的接入网设备。接入网设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备110(例如UE)进行通信。In the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 . An access network device may provide communication coverage for a particular geographic area, and may communicate with terminal devices 110 (eg, UEs) located within the coverage area.
网络设备120可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是下一代无线接入网(Next Generation Radio Access Network,NG RAN)设备,或者是NR系统中的基站(gNB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备120可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、集线器、交换机、网桥、路由器,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。The network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a next generation radio access network (Next Generation Radio Access Network, NG RAN) device, Or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).
终端设备110可以是任意终端设备,其包括但不限于与网络设备120或其它终端设备采用有线或者无线连接的终端设备。The terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, which includes, but is not limited to, a terminal device that adopts a wired or wireless connection with the network device 120 or other terminal devices.
例如,所述终端设备110可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进网络中的终端设备等。For example, the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, end devices in 5G networks or end devices in future evolved networks, etc.
终端设备110可以用于设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)的通信。The terminal device 110 may be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
无线通信系统100还可以包括与基站进行通信的核心网设备130,该核心网设备130可以是5G核心网(5G Core,5GC)设备,例如,接入与移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF),又例如,认证服务器功能(Authentication Server Function,AUSF),又例如,用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF),又例如,会话管理功能(Session Management Function,SMF)。可选地,核心网络设备130也可以是LTE网络的分组核心演进(Evolved Packet Core,EPC)设备,例如,会话管理功能+核心网络的数据网关(Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway,SMF+PGW-C)设备。应理解,SMF+PGW-C可以同时实现SMF和PGW-C所能实现的功能。在网络演进过程中,上述核心网设备也有可能叫其它名字,或者通过对核心网的功能进行划分形成新的网络实体,对此本申请实施例不做限制。The wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station, and the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, an Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function). , AMF), another example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), another example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), another example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF). Optionally, the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of an LTE network, for example, a session management function+core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) Equipment. It should be understood that the SMF+PGW-C can simultaneously implement the functions that the SMF and the PGW-C can implement. In the process of network evolution, the above-mentioned core network equipment may also be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing the functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
通信系统100中的各个功能单元之间还可以通过下一代网络(next generation,NG)接口建立连接实现通信。The various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
例如,终端设备通过NR接口与接入网设备建立空口连接,用于传输用户面数据和控制面信令;终端设备可以通过NG接口1(简称N1)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;接入网设备例如下一代无线接入基站(gNB),可以通过NG接口3(简称N3)与UPF建立用户面数据连接;接入网设备可以通过NG接口2(简称N2)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口4(简称N4)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口6(简称N6)与数据网络交互用户面数据;AMF可以通过NG接口11(简称N11)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;SMF可以通过NG接口7(简称N7)与PCF建立控制面信令连接。For example, the terminal equipment establishes an air interface connection with the access network equipment through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal equipment can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (N3 for short); the access network equipment can establish a control plane signaling with the AMF through the NG interface 2 (N2 for short). connection; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (N11 for short) The SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through the NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
图1示例性地示出了一个基站、一个核心网设备和两个终端设备,可选地,该无线通信系统100可以包括多个基站设备并且每个基站的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。FIG. 1 exemplarily shows one base station, one core network device and two terminal devices. Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and the coverage area of each base station may include other numbers of terminals equipment, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例中网络/系统中具有通信功能的设备均可称为通信设备。以图1示出的通信系统100为例,通信设备可包括具有通信功能的网络设备120和终端设备110,网络设备120和终端设备110可以为上文所述的设备,此处不再赘述;通信设备还可包括通信系统100中的其他设备,例如网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例中对此不做限定。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, a device having a communication function in the network/system can be referred to as a communication device. Taking the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 as an example, the communication device may include a network device 120 and a terminal device 110 with a communication function, and the network device 120 and the terminal device 110 may be the devices described above, which will not be repeated here; The communication device may further include other devices in the communication system 100, such as other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应理解,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this article is only an association relationship to describe the associated objects, indicating that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, it can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and A and B exist independently B these three cases. In addition, the character "/" in this document generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.
本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信方法,可用于确定发送SRS的时隙。The embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method, which can be used to determine a time slot for sending an SRS.
为便于对本申请实施例的理解,下面对SRS进行介绍。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the SRS is introduced below.
探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)信号是5G/NR系统中重要的参考信号,广泛用于NR系统中的各种功能中,例如,SRS可以用于以下场景:The Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) signal is an important reference signal in the 5G/NR system and is widely used in various functions in the NR system. For example, the SRS can be used in the following scenarios:
1.用于下行信道状态信息的获取(UE sounding procedure for DL CSI acquisition)1. For the acquisition of downlink channel state information (UE sounding procedure for DL CSI acquisition)
2.用于上行传输的频域调度和预编码确定;2. Frequency domain scheduling and precoding determination for uplink transmission;
3.用于天线切换(Antenna Switching)功能;3. Used for Antenna Switching function;
4.用于载波切换(Carrier Switching)功能(UE sounding procedure between component carriers);4. Used for carrier switching (UE sounding procedure between component carriers);
5.用于定位功能;5. Used for positioning function;
6.配合基于码本(codebook-based)的上行传输;6. Cooperate with codebook-based uplink transmission;
7.配合基于非码本(Non-Codebook based)的上行传输。7. Cooperate with the uplink transmission based on non-codebook (Non-Codebook based).
网络设备可以给一个终端设备配置一个或多个SRS资源组(SRS Resource set),每个SRS Resource set可以配置1个或多个SRS resource(SRS资源)。A network device can configure one or more SRS resource groups (SRS Resource sets) for a terminal device, and each SRS Resource set can configure one or more SRS resources (SRS resources).
SRS的传输可以分为周期性(Periodic)、半持续(Semi-persistent)、非周期(Aperiodic)。The transmission of the SRS can be divided into periodic (Periodic), semi-persistent (Semi-persistent), and aperiodic (Aperiodic).
周期SRS是指周期性传输的SRS,其周期和时隙偏移由RRC信令配置,终端设备一旦接收到相应的配置参数,就按照一定的周期发送SRS,直到所述RRC配置失效。周期性SRS的空间相关信息(Spatial Relation Info)也由RRC信令配置。所述空间相关信息可以指示一个信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS),同步信号/物理广播信道块(Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block,SSB)或者参考SRS。例如,可以通过隐式的方式来指示周期SRS的发送波束。例如,终端设备根据指示的CSI-RS/SSB来确定周期SRS的发送波束。再如, 终端设备可以通过SRS资源的空间相关信息确定在SRS资源上传输SRS所用的发送波束。Periodic SRS refers to periodically transmitted SRS, and its period and time slot offset are configured by RRC signaling. Once the terminal device receives the corresponding configuration parameters, it will send SRS according to a certain period until the RRC configuration is invalid. The spatial correlation information (Spatial Relation Info) of the periodic SRS is also configured by RRC signaling. The spatial correlation information may indicate a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (Synchronization Signal/PBCH Block, SSB) or a reference SRS. For example, the transmission beam of the periodic SRS may be indicated in an implicit manner. For example, the terminal device determines the transmission beam of the periodic SRS according to the indicated CSI-RS/SSB. For another example, the terminal device may determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the SRS resource through the spatial correlation information of the SRS resource.
半持续性SRS的周期和时隙偏移(slot offset)由RRC信令配置,但其激活和去激活信令是通过MAC CE承载的。终端设备在接收到激活信令后开始传输SRS,直到接收到去激活信令为止。半持续SRS的空间相关信息(发送波束)通过激活SRS的MAC CE一起承载。The period and slot offset of semi-persistent SRS are configured by RRC signaling, but its activation and deactivation signaling is carried by MAC CE. The terminal device starts to transmit SRS after receiving the activation signaling until it receives the deactivation signaling. The spatially related information (transmission beam) of the semi-persistent SRS is carried along with the MAC CE that activates the SRS.
终端设备接收到RRC配置的周期和时隙偏移后,根据以下公式确定能够用于传输SRS的时隙:After receiving the period and time slot offset configured by RRC, the terminal equipment determines the time slot that can be used to transmit SRS according to the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000001
其中,T SRS和T offset为配置的周期和偏移,n f
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000002
分别为无线帧和时隙编号。
Among them, T SRS and T offset are the configured period and offset, n f and
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000002
are the radio frame and time slot numbers, respectively.
非周期SRS传输指网络设备可以通过DCI触发终端设备的SRS传输。用于触发非周期SRS传输的触发信令既可以通过UE专属搜索空间或公共搜索空间(Common search space)中用于调度PUSCH/PDSCH的DCI承载,也可以通过公共搜索空间中的DCI format 2_3来承载。Aperiodic SRS transmission means that the network device can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal device through DCI. The trigger signaling for triggering aperiodic SRS transmission can be either through the DCI bearer for scheduling PUSCH/PDSCH in the UE-specific search space or the common search space (Common search space), or through the DCI format 2_3 in the common search space. bear.
其中,DCI format 2_3不仅可以用于触发非周期SRS传输,也可以同时用于配置一组UE或一组载波上的SRS的功率控制指令(TPC)命令。Wherein, DCI format 2_3 can not only be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission, but also can be used to configure a power control command (TPC) command of SRS on a group of UEs or a group of carriers at the same time.
表1 SRS触发信令Table 1 SRS trigger signaling
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000003
例如,若DCI中的SRS请求域的值为11,则SRS的触发信令指示使用更高层参数非周期SRS资源触发(aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger)设置为3的SRS资源组进行SRS传输。For example, if the value of the SRS request field in the DCI is 11, the trigger signaling of the SRS indicates that the SRS resource group with the higher layer parameter aperiodic SRS resource trigger (aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger) set to 3 is used for SRS transmission.
终端设备接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI)后,在触发信令所指示的非周期SRS资源组上进行SRS传输。其中,触发信令与SRS传输之间的时隙偏移(slot offset)可以由高层信令(RRC)配置。网络设备预先通过高层信令指示终端设备每个SRS资源组的配置参数,包括时频资源、序列参数、功率控制参数等。另外,对于触发的SRS资源组中的每个SRS资源,终端设备还可以通过该资源的空间相关信息确定在该资源上传输SRS所用的发送波束,该空间相关信息可通过RRC配置给每个SRS资源。After receiving the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (eg DCI), the terminal device performs SRS transmission on the aperiodic SRS resource group indicated by the trigger signaling. The time slot offset (slot offset) between the trigger signaling and the SRS transmission may be configured by higher layer signaling (RRC). The network device pre-instructs the terminal device configuration parameters of each SRS resource group through high-level signaling, including time-frequency resources, sequence parameters, power control parameters, and the like. In addition, for each SRS resource in the triggered SRS resource group, the terminal device can also determine the transmission beam used for transmitting the SRS on the resource through the spatial correlation information of the resource, and the spatial correlation information can be configured for each SRS through RRC resource.
在新空口(New Radio,NR)系统中,为了支持各种可能的部署场景,以及未来各种新型业务类型,系统设计非常灵活,例如,上下行的资源可以通过高层信令以及物理层信令来指示和调整。因此,针对一个时隙(slot)或一个slot上的某些符号在不同的时刻可能可以用于不同方向的传输,例如,某个时刻可以用于上行传输,某个时刻用于下行传输。In the New Radio (NR) system, in order to support various possible deployment scenarios and various new service types in the future, the system design is very flexible. For example, the uplink and downlink resources can be transmitted through high-level signaling and physical layer signaling. to indicate and adjust. Therefore, some symbols in a slot or a slot may be used for transmission in different directions at different times, for example, a certain time can be used for uplink transmission, and a certain time can be used for downlink transmission.
但是,如前所述,针对非周期探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS),其时隙偏移(slot offset)可以由高层信令配置,相当于,在RRC信令重新配置其他取值之前,每次触发信令与SRS传输之间的时隙偏移是不变的,导致用于接收触发信令的时隙和用于发送SRS的时隙相对位置是固定的,增加了限制性并降低了系统灵活性。However, as mentioned above, for the aperiodic sounding reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS), its slot offset (slot offset) can be configured by high-level signaling, which is equivalent to before the RRC signaling reconfigures other values. , the time slot offset between each trigger signaling and SRS transmission is constant, resulting in a fixed relative position between the time slot used to receive the trigger signaling and the time slot used to send the SRS, which increases the restriction and Reduced system flexibility.
例如,假设时隙偏移为k,如果要触发SRS在slot n+k上传输,那么对应的触发信令只能在slot n上发送,这就限制了发送触发信令的时机,给网络设备的调度工作增加了额外不必要的限制。For example, assuming that the time slot offset is k, if the SRS is to be triggered to transmit on slot n+k, the corresponding trigger signaling can only be sent on slot n, which limits the timing of sending trigger signaling, and gives the network device The scheduling of jobs adds additional unnecessary constraints.
再如,当某个slot,或者某个slot上某些符号被动态地从可以上行传输变成下行传输时,可能会使得某次非周期SRS无法传输。例如,若slot n+k被更改为用于下行传输,则在slot n上发送的触发SRS信令是无效的,或者不能在slot n上发送触发信令。For another example, when a certain slot, or some symbols on a certain slot are dynamically changed from uplink transmission to downlink transmission, a certain aperiodic SRS may not be transmitted. For example, if slot n+k is changed to be used for downlink transmission, the trigger SRS signaling sent on slot n is invalid, or the trigger signaling cannot be sent on slot n.
在本申请的一些实施例中,若网络设备在slot n上发送SRS触发信令,则终端设备可以在slot n+k或之后的第一个有效slot上传输SRS。通过在slot n+k或之后的第一个有效slot上传输SRS,虽然可以提高传输SRS的成功率,但效率不高,还会增加网络设备的配置和调度复杂度,主要原因在于有效slot不是固定的,需要根据相关配置或因素(例如上下行时隙配置和/或指示)来确定。In some embodiments of the present application, if the network device sends SRS trigger signaling on slot n, the terminal device can transmit SRS on slot n+k or the first valid slot after that. By transmitting SRS on slot n+k or the first effective slot after that, although the success rate of transmitting SRS can be improved, the efficiency is not high, and the configuration and scheduling complexity of network equipment will be increased. The main reason is that the effective slot is not It is fixed and needs to be determined according to related configurations or factors (eg, uplink and downlink time slot configuration and/or indication).
进一步的,本申请实施例提供了一种无线通信方法,。Further, an embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication method.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,将能够或可用于传输SRS的时隙称为有效时隙(valid slot)。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, a time slot that can or can be used to transmit an SRS is referred to as a valid time slot (valid slot).
图2示出了根据本申请实施例的无线通信方法200的示意性流程图,所述方法200可以由终端设备和网络设备交互执行。图2中所示的终端设备可以是如图1所示的终端设备,图2中所示的网络设备可以是如图1所示的接入网设备。FIG. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method 200 may be executed interactively by a terminal device and a network device. The terminal device shown in FIG. 2 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 1 , and the network device shown in FIG. 2 may be the access network device shown in FIG. 1 .
如图2所示,所述方法200可包括:As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include:
S210,接收第一指示信息;S210, receiving first indication information;
S220,基于所述第一指示信息确定目标小区组(Cell Set),其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。S220. Determine a target cell set (Cell Set) based on the first indication information, where the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger SRS on active cells in the target cell set.
例如,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息确定至少一个小区组中的目标小区组。For example, the terminal device determines a target cell group in at least one cell group according to the first indication information.
通过所述第一指示信息,使得第一小区上的非周期SRS触发信令,可触发终端设备在目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS传输,换言之,能够实现针对多小区场景下的跨小区(或跨载波)或多小区(或多载波)的非周期SRS的触发传输。Through the first indication information, the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling on the first cell can trigger the SRS transmission of the terminal equipment on the active cell in the target cell group. Triggered transmission of aperiodic SRS (or across carriers) or multi-cell (or multi-carrier).
此外,避免了为每个小区仅通过自己接收的非周期SRS触发信令触发SRS,不仅能够提高触发信令的灵活性,还能够降低非周期SRS触发信令(DCI)的资源消耗。In addition, it is avoided to trigger the SRS for each cell only through the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling received by itself, which can not only improve the flexibility of the trigger signaling, but also reduce the resource consumption of the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (DCI).
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令可以通过下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2之一进行传输,或者,也可以通过进行DCI格式2_3传输。In some embodiments of the present application, the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling may be transmitted through one of downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2, or, also Can be transmitted by doing DCI format 2_3.
例如,不同的触发状态可以对应不同的小区组。For example, different trigger states may correspond to different cell groups.
换言之,所述目标小区组为所述第一触发状态对应的小区组。In other words, the target cell group is a cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
可选的,所述第一触发状态可以是非零触发状态。Optionally, the first trigger state may be a non-zero trigger state.
可选的,所述第一触发状态的具体类别可以参见表1所示的触发状态。Optionally, for the specific category of the first trigger state, reference may be made to the trigger states shown in Table 1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息和所述非周期SRS触发信令位于同一信令内,所述第一指示信息通过所述同一信令中的第一域指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
换言之,所述第一指示信息可以和所述非周期SRS触发信令作为一个信令或者承载在同一个信令中发送给终端设备。In other words, the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling may be sent to the terminal device as one signaling or carried in the same signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令中上行链路共享信道UL-SCH指示的取值为0,所述第一域包括以下域中至少一个域的部分或全部比特位;In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
载波指示(Carrier indicator)域;Carrier indicator field;
BWP指示(Bandwidth part indicator)域;BWP indicator (Bandwidth part indicator) field;
频域资源分配(Frequency domain resource assignment)域;Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain;
时域资源分配(Time domain resource assignment)域;Time domain resource assignment domain;
调制编码方案(Modulation and coding scheme)域;Modulation and coding scheme field;
冗余版本(Redundancy version)域;Redundancy version field;
混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request,HARQ)进程号(process number)域;Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process number field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令(TPC command for scheduled PUSCH)域;The transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)域;SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator) field;
预编码信息和层数(Precoding information and number of layers)域;或Precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型(Antenna ports)域。Antenna ports field.
例如,载波指示域的bit数目可以是3,相当于,所述目标小区组可以最多可以是8个小区组中的小区组,在复杂度和灵活性之间比较好的折中。时域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。频域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。调制编码方案域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。HARQ进程号域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。SRS资源指示域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。预编码信息和层数域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。天线端口类型域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。For example, the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility. The number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network. The number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
此外,通过第一域中的部分或全部比特位承载所述第一指示信息,相当于,复用所述第一域的比特承载所述第一指示信息,能够降低信令开销。In addition, part or all of the bits in the first field are used to carry the first indication information, which is equivalent to multiplexing the bits of the first field to carry the first indication information, which can reduce signaling overhead.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域为所述第一指示信息专用的域。In some embodiments of the present application, the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
换言之,所述第一域中的比特专门用于承载所述第一指示信息。In other words, the bits in the first field are exclusively used to carry the first indication information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域是否存在通过第一RRC信令确定。In some embodiments of the present application, whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
例如,终端设备通过所述第一RRC信令确定所述终端设备是否存在所述第一域。例如,在存在所述第一域的情况下,所述终端设备可在所述第一域获取所述第一指示信息。例如,在不存在所述第一域的情况下,所述终端设备可通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态确定所述目标小区组。For example, the terminal device determines whether the first domain exists in the terminal device through the first RRC signaling. For example, in the presence of the first domain, the terminal device may acquire the first indication information in the first domain. For example, in the case where the first domain does not exist, the terminal device may determine the target cell group through the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the method 200 may further include:
接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
例如,所述终端设备接收网络设备发送的所述第二指示信息,以确定所述终端设备触发SRS的方式。例如,所述第二指示信息用于指示终端设备激活基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的功能。For example, the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the network device to determine the manner in which the terminal device triggers the SRS. For example, the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to activate the function of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
例如,所述第二指示信息通过第二RRC信令承载。在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法200还可包括:For example, the second indication information is carried by the second RRC signaling. In some embodiments of the present application, the method 200 may further include:
发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Sending capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
例如,所述终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述能力信息,以表示所述终端设备支持基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的功能。For example, the terminal device sends the capability information to the network device to indicate that the terminal device supports a function of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
需要说明的是,本申请中涉及的基于小区组触发小区上的SRS,指的是同一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发对应小区组中所有小区上的SRS传输,或者可以触发对应小区组中所有活跃小区上的SRS传输。例如,所述第二指示信息可以用于指示终端设备激活同一个非周期SRS触发信令触发对应小区组中所有小区上的SRS传输的触发方式,或者,所述第二指示信息可以用于指示终端设备激活同一个非周期SRS触发信令触发对应小区组中所有活跃小区上的SRS传输的触发方式。类似的,所述能力信息可用于指示终端设备是否具备同一个非周期SRS触发信令触发对应小区组中所有小区上的SRS传输的能力,或者,所述能力信息可用于指示终端设备是否具备同一个非周期SRS触发信令可以触发对应小区组中所有活跃小区上的SRS传输的能力。It should be noted that the triggering of the SRS on the cell based on the cell group involved in this application means that the same aperiodic SRS triggering signaling can trigger the SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group, or can trigger the SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group. SRS transmission on all active cells. For example, the second indication information may be used to instruct the terminal device to activate the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling to trigger the triggering method of SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group, or the second indication information may be used to indicate A triggering method in which the terminal device activates the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling to trigger SRS transmission on all active cells in the corresponding cell group. Similarly, the capability information can be used to indicate whether the terminal device has the capability of triggering SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group by the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, or the capability information can be used to indicate whether the terminal device has the same aperiodic SRS trigger signaling capability to trigger SRS transmission on all cells in the corresponding cell group. An aperiodic SRS trigger signaling can trigger the capability of SRS transmission on all active cells in the corresponding cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the method 200 may further include:
接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示至少一个小区组,所述至少一个小区组包括所述目标小区组。Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
例如,所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的所述第三指示信息,以便所述终端设备接收到所述第一指示信息后,在所述至少一个小区组中确定所述目标小区组。For example, the terminal device receives the third indication information sent by the network device, so that the terminal device determines the target cell group in the at least one cell group after receiving the first indication information.
例如,终端设备根据所述第一指示信息确定所述至少一个小区组中的目标小区组。For example, the terminal device determines a target cell group in the at least one cell group according to the first indication information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应所述第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的,且所述第三指示信息指示了所述至少一个小区组。相当于,针对不同的小区,或者针对一个小区的不同BWP,其配置的至少一个小区组可以不同。由此,可以提升配置的灵活性,进而提高网络设备优化性能。In other words, the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group. Equivalently, for different cells, or for different BWPs of a cell, at least one cell group configured therein may be different. Thereby, the flexibility of configuration can be improved, thereby improving the optimization performance of the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应至少一个触发状态,所述至少一个触发状态包括所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state, and the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对触发状态配置的,且所述第三指示信息指示了所述至少一个小区组。例如,不同的触发状态可对应不同的小区组。相当于,两个不同的触发状态可能可以触发不同小区组中的小区上的非周期SRS传输。例如至少一个小区组中的某个小区组对应的触发状态可以是非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态。例如触发状态1可以对应小区0和小区1上的非周期SRS传输,即触发状态1可以用于触发小区0和小区1中的活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输。再如,触发状态2可以对应小区0、小区1和小区3上的非周期SRS传输,即触发状态2可以用于触发小区0、小区1和小区3中的活跃小区上的非周期SRS传输。In other words, the third indication information is configured for a trigger state, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group. For example, different trigger states may correspond to different cell groups. Equivalently, two different trigger states may trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on cells in different cell groups. For example, the trigger state corresponding to a certain cell group in the at least one cell group may be the first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling. For example, trigger state 1 may correspond to aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0 and cell 1, that is, trigger state 1 may be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on active cells in cell 0 and cell 1. For another example, trigger state 2 may correspond to aperiodic SRS transmission on cell 0, cell 1 and cell 3, that is, trigger state 2 may be used to trigger aperiodic SRS transmission on active cells in cell 0, cell 1 and cell 3.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第三指示信息可以使针对终端设备配置的。换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对终端设备的触发状态配置的。即第三指示信息指示的至少一个触发状态与至少一个小区组的对应关系适用于所述终端设备的各个小区,或者适用于所述终端设备的各个小区的各个BWP。For example, the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a terminal device. In other words, the third indication information is configured for the trigger state of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to each cell of the terminal device, or to each BWP of each cell of the terminal device.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第三指示信息可以使针对终端设备的一个第一小区组(Cell group)配置的。换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对终端设备的一个第一小区组上的触发状态配置的。即第三指示信息指示的至少一个触发状态与至少一个小区组的对应关系适用于所述一个第一小区组的各个小区,或者适用于所述一个第一小区组的各个小区的各个BWP。For example, the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for a first cell group (Cell group) of the terminal device. In other words, the third indication information is configured for a trigger state on a first cell group of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to each cell of the one first cell group, or to each BWP of each cell of the one first cell group.
需要说明的是,所述第一小区组可以指双连接(Dual Connection,DC)下的小区组。例如主小区组(MCG,Master Cell group),或者辅小区组(SCG,Secondary Cell group)。而本申请中涉及的至少一个小区组中的一个小区组和目标小区组均可以理解为一个非周期SRS触发信令可触发的一个或多个小区所形成的小区组。It should be noted that the first cell group may refer to a cell group under a dual connection (Dual Connection, DC). For example, a master cell group (MCG, Master Cell group), or a secondary cell group (SCG, Secondary Cell group). However, both a cell group and a target cell group in the at least one cell group involved in this application may be understood as a cell group formed by one or more cells that can be triggered by an aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第三指示信息可以使针对终端设备的一个小区配置的。换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对终端设备的一个小区上的触发状态配置的。即第三指示信息指示的至少一个触发状态与至少一个小区组的对应关系适用于所述一个小区,或者适用于所述一个小区的各个BWP。For example, the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for one cell of the terminal device. In other words, the third indication information is configured for the trigger state on one cell of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to the one cell, or applicable to each BWP of the one cell.
例如,本申请实施例中涉及的第三指示信息可以使针对终端设备的一个小区的一个BWP配置的。换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对终端设备一个小区的一个BWP上的触发状态配置的。即第三指示信息指示的至少一个触发状态与至少一个小区组的对应关系适用于所述一个小区的所述一个BWP。For example, the third indication information involved in this embodiment of the present application may be configured for one BWP of one cell of the terminal device. In other words, the third indication information is configured for the trigger state on one BWP of one cell of the terminal device. That is, the correspondence between at least one trigger state indicated by the third indication information and at least one cell group is applicable to the one BWP of the one cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应终端设备或所述终端设备的第一小区组,其中,所述终端设备的所述第一小区或所述第一小区组中的所述第一小区上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述终端设备或所述第一小区组对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
换言之,所述第三指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的,且所述第三指示信息指示了所述至少一个小区组。相当于,针对不同的小区,或者同一个小区组中的不同小区,其配置的至少一个小区组可以是相同的。由此,网络设备和终端设备实现和处理简单,可以降低实现复杂度。In other words, the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell, and the third indication information indicates the at least one cell group. Equivalently, for different cells or different cells in the same cell group, the configured at least one cell group may be the same. Therefore, the network device and the terminal device are simple to implement and process, and the implementation complexity can be reduced.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过第三RRC信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
可选的,上文所述第一RRC信令、上文所述第二RRC信令、上文所述第三RRC信令中的部分或者全部在同一个信令中承载。Optionally, some or all of the above-mentioned first RRC signaling, the above-mentioned second RRC signaling, and the above-mentioned third RRC signaling are carried in the same signaling.
可选的,上文所述第一RRC信令、上文所述第二RRC信令、上文所述第三RRC信令中的部分或者全部是同一个RRC信令。Optionally, some or all of the above-mentioned first RRC signaling, the above-mentioned second RRC signaling, and the above-mentioned third RRC signaling are the same RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过以下中的至少一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
小区组CellGroupConfig。Cell group CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过位图或小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
例如,可以通过“BIT STRING(SIZE(T))”格式中的数值来配置,其中SIZE(T)中的T为一个正整数,表示一共 多少个bit。当然,命名和位置仅是本申请的示例,本申请对此不作具体限定。For example, it can be configured by a value in the "BIT STRING(SIZE(T))" format, where T in SIZE(T) is a positive integer, indicating how many bits in total. Of course, the names and positions are only examples of the present application, which are not specifically limited in the present application.
应理解,本申请中涉及的小区标识也可称为小区编号,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should be understood that the cell identifier involved in this application may also be referred to as a cell number, which is not specifically limited in this application.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
例如,所述MAC CE信令包括至少一个比特组,所述至少一个比特组中的一个比特组对应所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组,所述一个比特组中的一个比特位上的取值用于指示所述一个比特位对应的小区是否属于所述一个比特组对应的小区组。For example, the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and a bit on one bit in the one bit group The value is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
再如,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:For another example, the MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;或first information for indicating the number of the at least one cell group; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
下面结合图3至图7,对MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组的方案进行示例性说明。Below with reference to Fig. 3 to Fig. 7, the solution that the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap is exemplarily described.
如图3所示,所述MAC CE信令可包括服务小区标识(Serving Cell ID)和T个小区组的位图,其中,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图的长度为8。即,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图为C 0~C 7。如果所述终端配置的小区少于8个,则位图中部分比特不起作用,或者终端可以忽略位图中部分比特,或者位图中部分比特可以为预留比特。换言之,若前述MAC CE信令中的可用于位图的比特位的数量为X,且实际ServCellIndex最大值小于X,则X个比特位中的部分比特位可作为保留比特位。可选的,所述保留比特位可不用于实际用途。换言之,所述X个比特位可以包括所述用于指示所述第一小区组的除位图之外的保留比特位。所述保留比特位也可称为剩余的比特位。应理解,其他实施例中类似处理,为避免重复,不再一一赘述。 As shown in FIG. 3 , the MAC CE signaling may include a serving cell ID (Serving Cell ID) and a bitmap of T cell groups, wherein the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 8. That is, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 7 . If the number of cells configured by the terminal is less than 8, some bits in the bitmap are inactive, or the terminal may ignore some bits in the bitmap, or some bits in the bitmap may be reserved bits. In other words, if the number of bits available for the bitmap in the aforementioned MAC CE signaling is X, and the actual maximum value of ServCellIndex is less than X, then some of the X bits can be used as reserved bits. Optionally, the reserved bits may not be used for practical purposes. In other words, the X bits may include the reserved bits other than the bitmap for indicating the first cell group. The reserved bits may also be referred to as remaining bits. It should be understood that similar processes in other embodiments are not repeated to avoid repetition.
服务小区标识可以是上文所述的第一小区的标识。The serving cell identity may be the identity of the first cell described above.
换言之,服务小区标识可用于指示上文所述的MAC CE用于哪个小区(indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies)。例如,所述服务小区标识可占用5bit。In other words, the serving cell identity can be used to indicate which cell the MAC CE described above is used for (indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies). For example, the serving cell identifier may occupy 5 bits.
例如,C 0~C 7分别为上文所述的至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识对应的bit。 For example, C 0 to C 7 are respectively the bits corresponding to the identifiers of the cells in each of the above-mentioned at least one cell group.
换言之,C 0~C 7分别对应8个小区。例如,C 0~C 7中的C i对应服务小区索引(ServCellIndex)为i的小区,如果C i的取值为1,表示ServCellIndex为i的小区属于对应的小区组;如果C i的取值为0,表示ServCellIndex为i的小区不属于对应的小区组。当然,在其他可替代实施例中,如果C i的取值为0,表示ServCellIndex为i的小区属于对应的小区组;如果C i的取值为1,表示ServCellIndex为i的小区不属于对应的小区组。 In other words, C 0 to C 7 respectively correspond to 8 cells. For example, C i in C 0 to C 7 corresponds to a cell whose serving cell index (ServCellIndex) is i. If the value of C i is 1, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i belongs to the corresponding cell group; if the value of C i is 1 If it is 0, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i does not belong to the corresponding cell group. Of course, in other alternative embodiments, if the value of C i is 0, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i belongs to the corresponding cell group; if the value of C i is 1, it means that the cell whose ServCellIndex is i does not belong to the corresponding cell group. community group.
需要说明的是,本申请对未标注或者说明的bit不限制具体用途。例如,可以用于指示,也可用于Reserved bit。It should be noted that this application does not limit the specific use of bits that are not marked or described. For example, it can be used for indication or reserved bit.
例如,未标注或者说明的bit可以是R,R表示预留比特(reseved bit),例如,其取值可为0。For example, a bit that is not marked or described may be R, where R represents a reserved bit (reserved bit), for example, its value may be 0.
应理解,图3仅为本申请的示例,不应理解为对本申请的限制。It should be understood that FIG. 3 is only an example of the present application, and should not be construed as a limitation of the present application.
下面结合图4至图7对图3的变形结构进行示意性说明。The modified structure of FIG. 3 will be schematically described below with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7 .
如图4所示,所述MAC CE信令也可以包括X2,X1,X0。As shown in Figure 4, the MAC CE signaling may also include X2, X1, and X0.
其中,所述X2,X1,X0中的部分或者全部bit用于指示小区组的数目T。Wherein, some or all of the bits in X2, X1, and X0 are used to indicate the number T of cell groups.
换言之,所述X2,X1,X0中部分或全部bit可以用于承载上文所述的第一信息。In other words, some or all of the bits in X2, X1, and X0 may be used to carry the above-mentioned first information.
如图5所示,所述MAC CE信令也可包括带宽部分标识(Bandwidth Part ID,BWP ID)。例如,若所述至少一个小区组为针对第一小区上的第一BWP配置的,所述MAC CE信令可包括BWP ID。As shown in FIG. 5 , the MAC CE signaling may also include a bandwidth part identifier (Bandwidth Part ID, BWP ID). For example, if the at least one cell group is configured for the first BWP on the first cell, the MAC CE signaling may include the BWP ID.
BWP ID可以是上文所述的第一BWP的标识,即第一小区上的第一BWP的标识。The BWP ID may be the identifier of the first BWP described above, that is, the identifier of the first BWP on the first cell.
换言之,BWP ID可用于指示这个MAC CE用于哪个BWP(indicates a DL BWP for which the MAC CE applies)。例如,所述BWP ID可占用2bit。In other words, the BWP ID can be used to indicate which BWP this MAC CE applies to (indicates a DL BWP for which the MAC CE applies). For example, the BWP ID may occupy 2 bits.
如图6所示,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图的长度为24。As shown in Figure 6, the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 24.
即,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图为C 0~C 23That is, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 23 .
如图7所示,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图的长度为32。As shown in Figure 7, the length of the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is 32.
即,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图为C 0~C 31That is, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling is C 0 to C 31 .
应理解,图3至图7仅为本申请的示例,不应理解为对本申请的限制。It should be understood that FIG. 3 to FIG. 7 are only examples of the present application, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
例如,在其他可替代实施例中,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图,可从由左向右的排列顺序,变更为由右向左的排列顺序。换言之,只要保证终端设备和网络设备对每一个小区组中小区的排列顺序理解一致,本申请对所述每一个小区组中小区的排列顺序不作具体限定。For example, in other alternative embodiments, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling can be changed from the left-to-right arrangement order to the right-to-left arrangement order. In other words, as long as the terminal device and the network device have a consistent understanding of the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group, the present application does not specifically limit the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group.
再如,在其他可替代实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还可以包括其他信息。再如,在其他可替代的实施例中,所述MAC CE信令中的各个信息的位置可以更换,例如R可以放在第一行的末尾,也可以放在第一行的前面。For another example, in other alternative embodiments, the MAC CE signaling may also include other information. For another example, in other alternative embodiments, the position of each piece of information in the MAC CE signaling can be changed, for example, R can be placed at the end of the first line, or can be placed in front of the first line.
此外,可以基于终端设备配置的服务小区索引(ServCellIndex)的最大值确定所述MAC CE信令的格式。In addition, the format of the MAC CE signaling may be determined based on the maximum value of the serving cell index (ServCellIndex) configured by the terminal device.
例如,网络设备可以通过RRC信令确定或者切换所述至少一个比特位的长度,即确定或切换所述MAC CE信令的格式。例如,若所述终端设备配置的ServCellIndex的最大值小于8,可以使用位图的长度为8bit的MAC CE;若所述终端设备配置的ServCellIndex的最大值大于等于8,且小于16,可以使用位图的长度为16bit的MAC CE;若所述终端设备配置的ServCellIndex的最大值大于等于16,且小于24,可以使用位图的长度为24bit的MAC CE;若所述终端设备配置的ServCellIndex的最大值大于等于24,可以使用位图的长度为32bit的MAC CE。For example, the network device may determine or switch the length of the at least one bit through RRC signaling, that is, determine or switch the format of the MAC CE signaling. For example, if the maximum value of ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is less than 8, a MAC CE with a bitmap length of 8 bits can be used; if the maximum value of ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is greater than or equal to 8 and less than 16, the bitmap can be used The length of the picture is the MAC CE of 16 bits; if the maximum value of the ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is greater than or equal to 16 and less than 24, the MAC CE with the length of the bitmap of 24 bits can be used; if the maximum value of the ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is If the value is greater than or equal to 24, the MAC CE with a length of 32 bits of the bitmap can be used.
当然,也可以将可位图的长度的划分粒度也可以大于8。Of course, the division granularity of the length of the bitmap can also be greater than 8.
例如,若所述终端设备配置的ServCellIndex的最大值大于等于8,且小于32,可以使用位图的长度为16bit或32bit的MAC CE。For example, if the maximum value of ServCellIndex configured by the terminal device is greater than or equal to 8 and less than 32, a MAC CE with a bitmap length of 16 bits or 32 bits can be used.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
例如,所述MAC CE信令包括所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识。For example, the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
再如,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:For another example, the MAC CE signaling also includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;first information, used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group;
第二信息,一个所述第二信息用于指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的数量,或一个所述第二信息用于指示一个小区组中小区的数量;second information, one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
第三信息,一个第三信息用于指示一个小区标识指示的小区所属的小区组;或third information, one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组的数量为预定义的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为网络设备指示的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为终端设备根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
下面结合图8至图10,对本申请实施例提供的用于承载的小区标识的MAC CE信令的方案进行示例性说明。8 to 10, the solution for the MAC CE signaling of the bearer cell identity provided by the embodiment of the present application is exemplarily described.
如图8所示,所述MAC CE信令可包括服务小区标识(Serving Cell ID)0~K,以及服务小区标识1~K中的每一个服务小区标识对应的X2,X1,X0或者X2,X1,X0中的部分比特。As shown in FIG. 8 , the MAC CE signaling may include serving cell IDs (Serving Cell IDs) 0 to K, and X2, X1, X0 or X2 corresponding to each of the serving cell IDs 1 to K, and X2, X1, X0 or X2, Some bits in X1, X0.
服务小区标识0表示上文所述的第一小区的标识。The serving cell identifier 0 represents the identifier of the first cell described above.
换言之,服务小区标识0可用于指示上文所述的MAC CE信令用于哪个小区(indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies)。例如,所述服务小区标识0可占用5bit。In other words, serving cell identity 0 may be used to indicate which cell the MAC CE signaling described above is used for (indicates the identity of the Serving Cell for which the MAC CE applies). For example, the serving cell identifier 0 may occupy 5 bits.
服务小区标识1~K表示上文所述第二小区组中的小区的标识。The serving cell identifiers 1 to K represent the identifiers of the cells in the second cell group described above.
换言之,针对服务小区标识1~K中的服务小区标识i(i>=1),服务小区标识i可用于指示一个服务小区索引i(ServCellIndex i)。例如,服务小区标识i可占用5bit。In other words, for the serving cell identifier i (i>=1) in the serving cell identifiers 1 to K, the serving cell identifier i may be used to indicate a serving cell index i (ServCellIndex i). For example, the serving cell identifier i may occupy 5 bits.
其中,所述X2,X1,X0中的部分或者全部bit用于指示对应的服务小区标识所指示的小区所属的小区组。换言之,所述X2,X1,X0中的部分或者全部bit可用于承载上文所述的第三信息。Wherein, some or all of the bits in the X2, X1, and X0 are used to indicate the cell group to which the cell indicated by the corresponding serving cell identifier belongs. In other words, some or all of the bits in the X2, X1, and X0 may be used to carry the third information described above.
应理解,图13仅为本申请的示例,不应理解为对本申请的限制。It should be understood that FIG. 13 is only an example of the present application, and should not be construed as a limitation of the present application.
下面结合图14至图17对图13的变形结构进行示例性说明。The modified structure of FIG. 13 will be exemplarily described below with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 .
如图9所示,可以将服务小区标识1~K中的每一个服务小区标识对应的X2,X1,X0,替换为X 1_2,X 1_1,X 1_0~X T_2,X T_1,X T_0;所述X 1_2,X 1_1,X 1_0~X T_2,X T_1,X T_0中的X i_2,X i_1,X i_0中的全部或部分bit用于指示第i个小区组(1<=i<=T)含有多少个小区。 As shown in FIG. 9 , X2, X1, and X0 corresponding to each of the serving cell identifiers 1 to K may be replaced with X1_2 , X1_1 , X1_0 to XT_2 , XT_1 , and XT_0 ; All or part of the bits in X 1_2 , X 1_1 , X 1_0 to X T_2 , X T_1 , X i_1 , X i_0 are used to indicate the i-th cell group (1<=i<=T ) contains how many cells.
换言之,所述X 1_2,X 1_1,X 1_0~X T_2,X T_1,X T_0可以用于承载上文所述的第二信息。 In other words, the X 1_2 , X 1_1 , X 1_0 ˜XT_2 , X T_1 , and X T_0 may be used to carry the above-mentioned second information.
或者说,可以将MAC CE信令中的第三信息替换为第二信息。In other words, the third information in the MAC CE signaling can be replaced with the second information.
如图10所示,可以将服务小区标识1~K中的每一个服务小区标识对应的X2,X1,X0,替换为所述X 5,X 4,X 3,X 2,X 1,X 0,所述X 5,X 4,X 3,X 2,X 1,X 0中的部分或者全部bit用于指示对用于指示每个小区组含有多少个小区。 As shown in FIG. 10 , X2, X1, X0 corresponding to each serving cell identifier in the serving cell identifiers 1 to K can be replaced with the X5, X4 , X3 , X2, X1, X0 , some or all of the bits in the X 5 , X 4 , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , and X 0 are used for indicating pairs to indicate how many cells each cell group contains.
换言之,所述至少一个小区组中不同的小区组中小区的数量不同时,可通过一个上述第二信息指示所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组中包括的小区的数量。即至少一个所述第二信息分别指示所述至少一个小区组中小区的数量。所述至少一个小区组中不同的小区组中小区的数量相同时,可通过一个上述第二信息指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中包括的小区的数量。通过一个所述第二信息,可以降低所述终端设备需要解读的bit数,降低终端设备的复杂度以及提升灵活性。In other words, when the number of cells in different cell groups in the at least one cell group is different, the number of cells included in one cell group in the at least one cell group may be indicated by one piece of the second information. That is, at least one of the second pieces of information respectively indicates the number of cells in the at least one cell group. When the number of cells in different cell groups in the at least one cell group is the same, the number of cells included in each cell group in the at least one cell group may be indicated by one piece of the second information. By using one piece of the second information, the number of bits to be interpreted by the terminal device can be reduced, the complexity of the terminal device can be reduced, and the flexibility can be improved.
还应理解,图3至图10所示的MAC CE信令中包括上述所述的第一小区的标识,在所述第三指示信息为针对终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的情况下,所述MAC CE信令中可不包括所述第一小区的标识或所述第一BWP的标识,当然,也可以同时不包括所述第一小区的标识和所述第一BWP的标识。It should also be understood that the MAC CE signaling shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 10 includes the identifier of the first cell described above, and the third indication information is configured for a terminal device or a cell group including the first cell In this case, the MAC CE signaling may not include the identity of the first cell or the identity of the first BWP, and of course, the identity of the first cell and the identity of the first BWP may not be included at the same time. logo.
例如,如图11所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括针对每个小区组的位图C 0~C 7For example, as shown in FIG. 11 , the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 7 for each cell group.
当然,如图12所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括针对每个小区组的位图C 0~C 23Of course, as shown in FIG. 12 , the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 23 for each cell group.
再如,如图13所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括针对每个小区组的位图C 0~C 31For another example, as shown in FIG. 13 , the MAC CE signaling only includes bitmaps C 0 to C 31 for each cell group.
再如,如图14所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括服务小区标识1~K,以及服务小区标识1~K中的每一个服务小区标识对应的X2,X1,X0。For another example, as shown in FIG. 14 , the MAC CE signaling only includes serving cell identifiers 1 to K, and X2, X1, and X0 corresponding to each serving cell identifier in the serving cell identifiers 1 to K.
再如,如图15所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括服务小区标识1~K,以及X 1_2,X 1_1,X 1_0~X T_2,X T_1,X T_0;所述X 1_2,X 1_1,X 1_0~X T_2,X T_1,X T_0中的X i_2,X i_1,X i_0中的全部或部分bit用于指示第i个小区组(1<=i<=T)含有多少个小区。 For another example, as shown in FIG. 15 , the MAC CE signaling only includes serving cell identifiers 1 to K, and X 1_2 , X 1_1 , X 1_0 to X T_2 , X T_1 , X T_0 ; the X 1_2 , X 1_1 , X 1_0 to X T_2 , X T_1 , X i_2 , X i_1 , and all or part of bits in X i_0 in X T_0 are used to indicate how many cells the i-th cell group (1<=i<=T) contains.
再如,如图16所示,所述MAC CE信令仅包括服务小区标识1~K,以及X 5,X 4,X 3,X 2,X 1,X 0,所述X 5,X 4,X 3,X 2,X 1,X 0中的部分或者全部bit用于指示对用于指示每个小区组含有多少个小区。 For another example, as shown in FIG. 16 , the MAC CE signaling only includes serving cell identifiers 1 to K, and X 5 , X 4 , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , X 0 , the X 5 , X 4 Part or all of the bits in , X 3 , X 2 , X 1 , and X 0 are used for indicating pairs to indicate how many cells each cell group contains.
当然,图11至16仅为示例,不应理解为对本申请的限制。Of course, FIGS. 11 to 16 are only examples, and should not be construed as limiting the present application.
例如,在其他可替代实施例中,所述MAC CE信令中针对每个小区组的位图,可从由左向右的排列顺序,变更为由右向左的排列顺序。换言之,只要保证终端设备和网络设备对每一个小区组中小区的排列顺序理解一致,本申请对所述每一个小区组中小区的排列顺序不作具体限定。For example, in other alternative embodiments, the bitmap for each cell group in the MAC CE signaling can be changed from the left-to-right arrangement order to the right-to-left arrangement order. In other words, as long as the terminal device and the network device have a consistent understanding of the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group, the present application does not specifically limit the arrangement order of the cells in each cell group.
再如,在其他可替代实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还可以包括其他信息。再如,在其他可替代的实施例中,所述MAC CE信令中的各个信息的位置可以更换,例如R可以放在第一行的末尾,也可以放在第一行的前面。For another example, in other alternative embodiments, the MAC CE signaling may also include other information. For another example, in other alternative embodiments, the position of each piece of information in the MAC CE signaling can be changed, for example, R can be placed at the end of the first line, or can be placed in front of the first line.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the method 200 may further include:
接收第四RRC信令,所述第四RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。Fourth RRC signaling is received, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
例如,终端设备接收网络设备发送的所述第四RRC信令。For example, the terminal device receives the fourth RRC signaling sent by the network device.
换言之,网络设备向终端设备发送所述第四RRC信令,以配置所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。In other words, the network device sends the fourth RRC signaling to the terminal device to configure the cells in the first cell and the target cell group.
需要说明的是,针对SRS,需要基于SRS资源组(SRS-ResourceSet)或SRS资源(SRS-Resource)进行传输。 换言之,终端设备发送的SRS可以是SRS资源组或SRS资源对应的SRS。SRS资源组对应的SRS的时隙偏移是针对SRS资源组配置的,SRS资源对应的时隙偏移是针对SRS资源配置的。上述介绍的SRS资源组对应的SRS也可以称为普通SRS。可选的,SRS资源组中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。SRS资源对应的SRS也可以为用于定位的SRS,通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置,对应的SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置。后面为了描述简单,部分地方只以普通SRS为例来介绍,但是其方案同样适用于定位SRS。It should be noted that, for SRS, transmission needs to be performed based on an SRS resource group (SRS-ResourceSet) or an SRS resource (SRS-Resource). In other words, the SRS sent by the terminal device may be an SRS resource group or an SRS corresponding to an SRS resource. The slot offset of the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group is configured for the SRS resource group, and the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource is configured for the SRS resource. The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group introduced above may also be referred to as a common SRS. Optionally, the usage field in the SRS resource group may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching). The SRS corresponding to the SRS resource may also be an SRS used for positioning, which is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16, and the corresponding SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16. In order to simplify the description later, only ordinary SRS is used as an example for introduction in some places, but the solution is also applicable to positioning SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of the different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in the different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS -Resource signaling configuration.
需要说明的是,本申请各个实施例涉及的SRS资源组均为非周期SRS资源组,SRS资源均为非周期SRS资源。It should be noted that the SRS resource groups involved in the various embodiments of the present application are all aperiodic SRS resource groups, and the SRS resources are all aperiodic SRS resources.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
例如,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。For example, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is from 1 to N-1 the integer.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 200 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located The SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
例如,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。For example, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is an activated timeslot offset among the multiple timeslot offsets shift.
再如,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。For another example, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
再如,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups. SRS Pos Resource Version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for the multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
例如,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。For example, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
例如,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。For example, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is determined based on the capability of the terminal device to report to the network device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法200还可包括:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method 200 may further include:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;A third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger The time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
例如,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。For example, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the number of timeslot offsets already in the multiple timeslot offsets. Active slot offset.
再如,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。For another example, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
再如,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。For another example, the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
需要说明的是,所述有效时隙也可以理解为可用于上行传输的时隙。所述可用于上行传输的时隙可以理解为仅用于上行传输的时隙,即一直用于上行传输,也可理解为含有上行符号(uplink symbol)的时隙,也可理解为含有灵活符号(flexible symbol)的时隙,也可以理解为灵活时隙(flexible slot),也可以理解为偶尔不可用于上行传输的时隙,例如,偶尔用于下行传输的时隙。可选的,本申请中的可用于上行传输的时隙实际能不能用于上行传输,需要看是否与其他信号发送碰撞。It should be noted that, the valid time slot may also be understood as a time slot available for uplink transmission. The time slot that can be used for uplink transmission can be understood as a time slot only used for uplink transmission, that is, it is always used for uplink transmission, it can also be understood as a time slot containing an uplink symbol (uplink symbol), and it can also be understood as a time slot containing flexible symbols. The time slot of (flexible symbol) can also be understood as a flexible time slot (flexible slot), and it can also be understood as a time slot that is occasionally unavailable for uplink transmission, for example, a time slot that is occasionally used for downlink transmission. Optionally, whether the time slot that can be used for uplink transmission in this application can actually be used for uplink transmission depends on whether it collides with other signal transmissions.
下面结合具体实施例对所述方法200的技术方案进行说明。需要说明,后续实施例中,步骤主要是为了描述相对关联的功能点,在实际实施时,部分步骤可以省略,或者不同步骤的相对顺序可以改变,或者不同步骤中的不同子过程的相对顺序可以改变,在此不做限定。可选的,在后续实施例中,SRS资源组指的是非周期SRS资源组;SRS资源指的是非周期SRS资源。The technical solution of the method 200 will be described below with reference to specific embodiments. It should be noted that, in the following embodiments, the steps are mainly used to describe relatively related function points. In actual implementation, some steps may be omitted, or the relative order of different steps may be changed, or the relative order of different sub-processes in different steps may be Changes are not limited here. Optionally, in subsequent embodiments, the SRS resource group refers to an aperiodic SRS resource group; the SRS resource refers to an aperiodic SRS resource.
实施例1:Example 1:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对所述第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个),网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-ResourceSet配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-Resource配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group on cell Z is configured through RRC signaling SRS-ResourceSet, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-Resource.
可选的,SRS-ResourceSet信令中的用途(usage)域可配置为波束管理(beamManagement),码本(codebook),非码本(nonCodebook),天线切换(antennaSwitching)中的一个。Optionally, the usage field in the SRS-ResourceSet signaling may be configured as one of beam management (beamManagement), codebook (codebook), non-codebook (nonCodebook), and antenna switching (antennaSwitching).
可选的,小区Z上所述SRS资源组配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, the SRS resource group on the cell Z is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,上述多个触发状态通过SRS-ResourceSet IE中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList来配置,其中aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger配置1个值,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置1个或多个值。Optionally, the above multiple trigger states are configured by aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList in the SRS-ResourceSet IE, wherein aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is configured with one value, and aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is configured with one or more values.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger取值范围为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, the flexibility of DCI triggering aperiodic SRS can be improved, and system performance can be improved, thereby enabling cross-cell triggering of aperiodic SRS, reducing DCI overhead, and increasing system flexibility. Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling. Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device can determine N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置。Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第三指示信息指示T组小区。每组小区含有1个或多个小区,其中T>=1。通过所述第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上传输的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发T组小区中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS,或者可以触发T组小区中的某个组中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS。For the cell Z, or the BWP Y of the cell Z, the network device indicates the T group of cells through the third indication information. Each group of cells contains one or more cells, where T>=1. The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells in a group.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过第二指示信息确定终端设备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, it may be determined by the second indication information that the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过bitmap来指示1个或多个小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,bitmap方法能够降低信令开销或资源开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多包含32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information includes at most 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过小区编号来指示1个或多个小区,即每组对应的信息包括所述1个或多个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells. When the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of cell groups is determined according to network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
可选的,所述第三指示信息可通过第三RRC信令传输。Optionally, the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第三RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
所述第三RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述第三RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述第三RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;或The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
可选的,所述第三指示信息可通过MAC CE信令传输,和通过RRC信令传输相比,MAC CE信令配置更加灵活,更改时延更低,可以为系统提供更大的灵活性。Optionally, the third indication information can be transmitted through MAC CE signaling. Compared with transmission through RRC signaling, the configuration of MAC CE signaling is more flexible, and the modification delay is lower, which can provide greater flexibility for the system. .
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络发送的RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is determined according to the RRC signaling sent by the network.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络发送的MAC CE信令确定。Optionally, the number of cell groups T is determined according to the MAC CE signaling sent by the network.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
选项1:Option 1:
终端设备在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触 发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
可选的,所述第一取值对应的T个小区组中的某个小区组(记为小区组t),则终端根据第一信令可以在小区组t中的1个或多个小区中的活跃小区上发送对应的非周期SRS(其中任意活跃小区记为Z’),可以复用DCI中的非周期SRS触发域使用的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。可以使用更多的场景。Optionally, in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), the terminal can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling. The corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI (any active cell is denoted as Z'), and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additional interpretation. bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
可选的,非周期SRS的非零触发状态与前述T个小区组对应。Optionally, the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
可选的,SRS request域的非零码点(codepoing)与前述T个小区组对应。SRS request域的非零codepoing可对应非周期SRS的非零触发状态。Optionally, the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups. The non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
选项2:终端在同一个信令中通过第一域(field)指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。相当于,可以复用DCI中的其他field的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。Option 2: The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
可选的,若第一信令中UL-SCH indicator取值为0,所述第一域可以使用DCI以下域中的全部或者部分bit来指示相关信息:Optionally, if the value of the UL-SCH indicator in the first signaling is 0, the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
载波指示(Carrier indicator)域;Carrier indicator field;
BWP指示(Bandwidth part indicator)域;BWP indicator (Bandwidth part indicator) field;
频域资源分配(Frequency domain resource assignment)域;Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain;
时域资源分配(Time domain resource assignment)域;Time domain resource assignment domain;
调制编码方案(Modulation and coding scheme)域;Modulation and coding scheme field;
冗余版本(Redundancy version)域;Redundancy version field;
混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request,HARQ)进程号(process number)域;Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process number field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令(TPC command for scheduled PUSCH)域;The transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)域;SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator) field;
预编码信息和层数(Precoding information and number of layers)域;或Precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型(Antenna ports)域。Antenna ports field.
例如,载波指示域的bit数目可以是3,相当于,所述目标小区组可以最多可以是8个小区组中的小区组,在复杂度和灵活性之间比较好的折中。时域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。频域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。调制编码方案域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。HARQ进程号域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。SRS资源指示域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。预编码信息和层数域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。天线端口类型域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。For example, the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility. The number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network. The number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
选项3:Option 3:
终端设备在同一个信令中通过第一域指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地指示小区组,从而为网络调度优化提供更大空间。和选项2相比,可以使用更多的场景,因为选项2只能适用UL-SCH indicator取值为0的场景。In the same signaling, the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Compared with option 1, the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization. Compared with option 2, more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,所述第一域是一个新增的域,其是否存在,根据网络RRC信令确定。Optionally, the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists is determined according to network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2,或者DCI Format 1_1,或DCI Format 1_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备根据第一信令可以在1个或多个小区上发送非周期SRS。The terminal device may send the aperiodic SRS on one or more cells according to the first signaling.
选项1:Option 1:
终端设备根据第一信令可以在小区组t中的1个或多个小区中的活跃小区上发送对应的非周期SRS,其中任意活跃小区记为Z’。可以实现只触发其他小区的非周期SRS传输,这可以为网络提供更大的灵活性。According to the first signaling, the terminal device may send the corresponding aperiodic SRS on an active cell in one or more cells in the cell group t, wherein any active cell is denoted as Z'. Aperiodic SRS transmissions that only trigger other cells can be implemented, which can provide greater flexibility to the network.
选项2:Option 2:
终端设备根据第一信令可以在小区Z,以及小区组t中的1个或多个小区中的活跃小区上发送对应的非周期SRS,其中任意活跃小区记为Z’,可以包括小区Z在内。和选项1相比,可以减少RRC或者MAC CE指示T个小区组时的信令开销。According to the first signaling, the terminal device can send the corresponding aperiodic SRS on the active cell in the cell Z and one or more cells in the cell group t, wherein any active cell is denoted as Z', which can include the cell Z in the active cell. Inside. Compared with option 1, the signaling overhead when RRC or MAC CE indicates T cell groups can be reduced.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区Z’,发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源组配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移。For each cell Z' in the above determined cells, the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value is sent. Since the aperiodic SRS resource group on Z' is configured with a trigger state, therefore There is an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value on each Z'. The corresponding SRS resource group is configured with one slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets.
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源所在的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the corresponding time slot offset of the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group where the SRS resource is located. SRS resources are transmitted on slot n'.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (in the case where the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the determined SRS transmission slot, that is, slot n'.
例如,可采用如下公式确定slot n’:For example, slot n’ can be determined using the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000004
其中,所述u SRS表示所述SRS对应的子载波间隔配置,所述u PDCCH表示所述触发信令使用的物理下行控制信道PDCCH对应的子载波间隔配置,所述k表示SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移,所述n表示所述第一时隙。 Wherein, the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS, the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling, and the k represents the corresponding SRS resource group. slot offset, where n represents the first slot.
再如,可以基于以下公式确定slot n’:As another example, slot n’ can be determined based on the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000005
其中,所述u SRS表示所述SRS对应的子载波间隔配置,所述u PDCCH表示所述触发信令使用的物理下行控制信道PDCCH对应的子载波间隔配置,所述
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000006
和所述u offset,PDCCH分别是取决于上层配置的用于接收物理下行控制信道PDCCH的针对载波聚合CA的时隙偏移的
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000007
和u offset,所述
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000008
和所述u offset,SRS分别是取决于上层配置的用于传输所述SRS的针对载波聚合CA的时隙偏移的
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000009
和u offset,所述k表示SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移,所述n表示所述第一时隙。此外,
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000010
和u offset可以是通信标准中规定的针对CA的时隙偏移的相关参数。
Wherein, the u SRS represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the SRS, the u PDCCH represents the subcarrier spacing configuration corresponding to the physical downlink control channel PDCCH used by the trigger signaling, and the
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000006
and the u offset, PDCCH respectively depends on the time slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for receiving the physical downlink control channel PDCCH
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000007
and u offset , the
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000008
and the u offset, the SRS respectively depends on the slot offset for carrier aggregation CA configured by the upper layer for transmitting the SRS
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000009
and u offset , where k represents the slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource group, and n represents the first slot. also,
Figure PCTCN2020117812-appb-000010
and u offset may be the relevant parameters of the slot offset for CA specified in the communication standard.
可选的,根据SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源组配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group (in the case that the SRS resource group is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the MAC signaling is activated The time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the k (when the SRS resource group is configured with multiple time slot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective time slot on cell Z' after the time slot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n '. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
实施例2:Example 2:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对非周期SRS触发状态配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
步骤1:终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。Step 1: The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例2中的步骤1可参考实施例1中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 2, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对非零非周期SRS触发状态,网络设备通过第三指示信息指示T组小区。每组小区含有1个或多个小区,其中T>=1。可选的,不同的非零非周期SRS触发状态可以对应所述T组小区中的不同组小区。通过所述第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上传输的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发T组小区中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS,或可以触发T组小区中的某个组的某些或者全部小区上的SRS。For the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state, the network device indicates the T group of cells through the third indication information. Each group of cells contains one or more cells, where T>=1. Optionally, different non-zero aperiodic SRS triggering states may correspond to different groups of cells in the T groups of cells. The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells of a group.
针对小区Z,或者小区Z的BWP Y,网络设备通过第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发状态S可以触发T组小区中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS。当小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上非周期SRS触发信令对应非零非周期SRS触发状态S时,则触发T组小区中的非零非周期SRS触发状态S对应的小区组中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS。For cell Z or the BWP Y of cell Z, the network device indicates through the first indication information that the aperiodic SRS trigger state S on cell Z or the BWP Y of cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells . When the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the BWP Y of cell Z or cell Z corresponds to the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S, some of the cell groups corresponding to the non-zero aperiodic SRS trigger state S in the T group of cells are triggered Or SRS on all cells.
可选的,上述非周期SRS触发状态S为非0的状态。Optionally, the aperiodic SRS triggering state S is a non-zero state.
可选的,针对不同的非周期SRS触发状态可以配置对应的不同小区组。Optionally, corresponding different cell groups may be configured for different aperiodic SRS triggering states.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令对应的触发状态S只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate relevant information through the above signaling, the trigger state S corresponding to the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过第二指示信息确定终端设备是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, the second indication information may be used to determine whether the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过bitmap来指示1个或多个小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,bitmap方法能够降低信令开销或资源开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过小区编号来指示1个或多个小区,即每组对应的信息包括所述1个或多个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells. When the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述小区组数目T通过网络RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of cell groups is determined through network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
可选的,所述第三指示信息可通过第三RRC信令传输。Optionally, the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第三RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;或The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon; or
所述RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置。The RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络发送的RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is determined according to the RRC signaling sent by the network.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络发送的MAC CE信令确定。Optionally, the number of cell groups T is determined according to the MAC CE signaling sent by the network.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
选项1:Option 1:
终端设备在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as value for short). is the first value), that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
可选的,所述第一取值对应的T个小区组中的某个小区组(记为小区组t),则终端根据第一信令可以在小区组t中的1个或多个小区中的活跃小区上发送对应的非周期SRS(其中任意活跃小区记为Z’),可以复用DCI中的非周期SRS触发域使用的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。可以使用更多的场景。Optionally, in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), the terminal can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling. The corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI (any active cell is denoted as Z'), and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additional interpretation. bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
可选的,非周期SRS的非零触发状态与前述T个小区组对应。Optionally, the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
可选的,SRS request域的非零码点(codepoing)与前述T个小区组对应。SRS request域的非零codepoing可对应非周期SRS的非零触发状态。Optionally, the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups. The non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
选项2:终端在同一个信令中通过第一域(field)指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。相当于,可以复用DCI中的其他field的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。Option 2: The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
可选的,若第一信令中UL-SCH indicator取值为0,所述第一域可以使用DCI以下域中的全部或者部分bit来指示相关信息:Optionally, if the value of the UL-SCH indicator in the first signaling is 0, the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
载波指示(Carrier indicator)域;Carrier indicator field;
BWP指示(Bandwidth part indicator)域;BWP indicator (Bandwidth part indicator) field;
频域资源分配(Frequency domain resource assignment)域;Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain;
时域资源分配(Time domain resource assignment)域;Time domain resource assignment domain;
调制编码方案(Modulation and coding scheme)域;Modulation and coding scheme field;
冗余版本(Redundancy version)域;Redundancy version field;
混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request,HARQ)进程号(process number)域;Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process number field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令(TPC command for scheduled PUSCH)域;The transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)域;SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator) field;
预编码信息和层数(Precoding information and number of layers)域;或Precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型(Antenna ports)域。Antenna ports field.
例如,载波指示域的bit数目可以是3,相当于,所述目标小区组可以最多可以是8个小区组中的小区组,在复杂度和灵活性之间比较好的折中。时域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。频域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。调制编码方案域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。HARQ进程号域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。SRS资源指示域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。预编码信息和层数域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。天线端口类型域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。For example, the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility. The number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network. The number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
选项3:Option 3:
终端设备在同一个信令中通过第一域指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地指示小区组,从而为网络调度优化提供更大空间。和选项2相比,可以使用更多的场景,因为选项2只能适用UL-SCH indicator取值为0的场景。In the same signaling, the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Compared with option 1, the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization. Compared with option 2, more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,所述第一域是一个新增的域,其是否存在,根据网络RRC信令确定。Optionally, the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists is determined according to network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2,或者DCI Format 1_1,或DCI Format 1_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
步骤3:应理解,实施例2中的步骤3可参考实施例1中的步骤3,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 3: It should be understood that, for Step 3 in Embodiment 2, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 1, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
实施例3:Example 3:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell.
步骤1:终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。Step 1: The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例3中的步骤1可参考实施例1中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 3, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:Step 2:
针对终端设备,或者针对终端设备的第一小区组,网络设备通过第三指示信息指示T组小区。每组小区含有1个或多个小区,其中T>=1。通过所述第一指示信息指示在小区Z或小区Z的BWP Y上传输的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发T组小区中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS,或者可以触发T组小区中的某个组中的某些或者全部小区上的SRS。例如,所述小区Z可以是所述终端设备上的任意小区或所述第一小区组内的任意小区。可选的,通过信令指示T组小区(小区),可以进一步通过DCI来指示某个小区组(记为Q),在小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令可以触发 小区组Q的小区上的非周期SRS传输,从而网络可以获得更大的灵活性和优化空间,提高系统性能。For the terminal device, or for the first cell group of the terminal device, the network device indicates the cells of the T group through the third indication information. Each group of cells contains one or more cells, where T>=1. The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling indicated by the first indication information to be transmitted on the cell Z or the BWP Y of the cell Z can trigger the SRS on some or all cells in the T group of cells, or can trigger the SRS in the T group of cells. SRS on some or all cells in a group. For example, the cell Z may be any cell on the terminal device or any cell in the first cell group. Optionally, the T group of cells (cells) are indicated by signaling, and a certain cell group (denoted as Q) can be further indicated by DCI, and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on cell Z can trigger the cells of cell group Q. Aperiodic SRS transmission on the network, so that the network can obtain greater flexibility and optimization space, and improve system performance.
可选的,网络设备未通过上述信令指示相关信息时,小区Z上发送的非周期SRS触发信令只触发小区Z对应上行链路上发送的SRS。相当于,终端设备未收到所述第一指示信息时,采用原有触发方式。Optionally, when the network device does not indicate the relevant information through the above signaling, the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling sent on the cell Z only triggers the SRS sent on the uplink corresponding to the cell Z. Equivalently, when the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, the original triggering method is used.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过第二指示信息确定终端设备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, it may be determined by the second indication information that the terminal device triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,终端设备接收所述第一指示信息之前,可通过所述能力信息指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Optionally, before the terminal device receives the first indication information, the capability information may be used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过bitmap来指示1个或多个小区,例如对应bit如果为规定值(例如1),则这一bit对应的小区属于所述一组小区,当所述一组小区数量较多时,bitmap方法能够降低信令开销或资源开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells through a bitmap. For example, if the corresponding bit is a specified value (for example, 1), the cell corresponding to this bit belongs to the group of cells. When the number of cells in the group is large, the bitmap method can reduce signaling overhead or resource overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,T个小区组中每组通过小区编号来指示1个或多个小区,即每组对应的信息包括所述1个或多个小区的标识,当所述一组小区数量较少时,能够降低信令开销。Optionally, each of the T cell groups indicates one or more cells by a cell number, that is, the information corresponding to each group includes the identifiers of the one or more cells. When the number of cells in the group is small, can reduce signaling overhead.
可选的,所述第三指示信息指示的至少一组小区中的每一个小区组最多指示32,或8,或4个,或2个小区。Optionally, each cell group in the at least one group of cells indicated by the third indication information indicates a maximum of 32, or 8, or 4, or 2 cells.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of cell groups is determined according to network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
可选的,所述第三指示信息可通过第三RRC信令传输。Optionally, the third indication information may be transmitted through third RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第三RRC信令可以通过如下中的任意一种方式配置:Optionally, the third RRC signaling may be configured in any of the following manners:
所述第三RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config;
所述第三RRC信令通过ServingCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过SpCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SpCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过SCellConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through SCellConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过ServingCellConfigCommon配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through ServingCellConfigCommon;
所述第三RRC信令通过UplinkConfig配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through UplinkConfig;
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-Uplink配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-Uplink;
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkCommon配置;The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkCommon;
所述第三RRC信令通过BWP-UplinkDedicated配置;或The third RRC signaling is configured through BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
所述第三RRC信令通过CellGroupConfig。The third RRC signaling is through CellGroupConfig.
可选的,所述第三指示信息可通过MAC CE信令传输,和通过RRC信令传输相比,MAC CE信令配置更加灵活,更改时延更低,可以为系统提供更大的灵活性。Optionally, the third indication information can be transmitted through MAC CE signaling. Compared with transmission through RRC signaling, the configuration of MAC CE signaling is more flexible, and the modification delay is lower, which can provide greater flexibility for the system. .
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络通过RRC信令确定。Optionally, the number T of cell groups is determined according to the network through RRC signaling.
可选的,所述小区组数目T根据网络通过MAC CE信令确定。Optionally, the number of cell groups T is determined according to the network through MAC CE signaling.
可选的,所述小区组数目T预先规定(协议规定)。Optionally, the number T of the cell groups is pre-specified (specified by the protocol).
选项1:Option 1:
终端设备在任一小区或者所述第一小区组中的任一小区上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on any cell or any cell in the first cell group, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (whichever The value is denoted as value, referred to as the first value for short), that is, in a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
可选的,所述第一取值对应的T个小区组中的某个小区组(记为小区组t),则终端根据第一信令可以在小区组t中的1个或多个小区中的活跃小区上发送对应的非周期SRS,可以复用DCI中的非周期SRS触发域使用的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。可以使用更多的场景。Optionally, in a certain cell group in the T cell groups corresponding to the first value (referred to as cell group t), the terminal can be in one or more cells in the cell group t according to the first signaling. The corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the active cell in the DCI, and the bits used in the aperiodic SRS trigger field in the DCI can be reused, and there is no need to add new bits, or to additionally interpret the bits of other fields. More scenarios can be used.
可选的,非周期SRS的非零触发状态与前述T个小区组对应。Optionally, the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS corresponds to the aforementioned T cell groups.
可选的,SRS request域的非零码点(codepoing)与前述T个小区组对应。SRS request域的非零codepoing可对应非周期SRS的非零触发状态。Optionally, the non-zero code points (codepoing) of the SRS request field correspond to the aforementioned T cell groups. The non-zero codepoing of the SRS request field can correspond to the non-zero trigger state of the aperiodic SRS.
选项2:终端在同一个信令中通过第一域(field)指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。相当于,可以复用DCI中的其他field的bit,不需要增加新的bit,或者不需要去额外解读其他field的bit。Option 2: The terminal indicates through the first field (field) in the same signaling which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Equivalently, the bits of other fields in the DCI can be reused without adding new bits or additionally interpreting the bits of other fields.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1 or DCI Format 0_2.
可选的,若第一信令中UL-SCH indicator取值为0,所述第一域可以使用DCI以下域中的全部或者部分bit来指示相关信息:Optionally, if the value of the UL-SCH indicator in the first signaling is 0, the first field may use all or part of the bits in the following fields of DCI to indicate relevant information:
载波指示(Carrier indicator)域;Carrier indicator field;
BWP指示(Bandwidth part indicator)域;BWP indicator (Bandwidth part indicator) field;
频域资源分配(Frequency domain resource assignment)域;Frequency domain resource assignment (Frequency domain resource assignment) domain;
时域资源分配(Time domain resource assignment)域;Time domain resource assignment domain;
调制编码方案(Modulation and coding scheme)域;Modulation and coding scheme field;
冗余版本(Redundancy version)域;Redundancy version field;
混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request,HARQ)进程号(process number)域;Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process number field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令(TPC command for scheduled PUSCH)域;The transmit power control TPC command (TPC command for scheduled PUSCH) field for a predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)域;SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator) field;
预编码信息和层数(Precoding information and number of layers)域;或Precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型(Antenna ports)域。Antenna ports field.
例如,载波指示域的bit数目可以是3,相当于,所述目标小区组可以最多可以是8个小区组中的小区组,在复杂度和灵活性之间比较好的折中。时域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。频域资源分配域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。调制编码方案域的bit数目固定, 最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。HARQ进程号域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域的bit数目固定,最大支持的组也固定,可以降低终端和网络复杂度。SRS资源指示域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。预编码信息和层数域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。天线端口类型域的bit数目可以较多,相当于,可以更灵活的指示所述目标小区组。For example, the number of bits in the carrier indication field may be 3, which is equivalent to that the target cell group may be a cell group among 8 cell groups at most, which is a good compromise between complexity and flexibility. The number of bits in the time domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the frequency domain resource allocation domain may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the modulation and coding scheme field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits in the HARQ process ID field is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce terminal and network complexity. The number of bits used in the transmission power control TPC command field of the predetermined PUSCH is fixed, and the maximum supported group is also fixed, which can reduce the complexity of the terminal and the network. The number of bits in the SRS resource indication field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the precoding information and layer number fields may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly. The number of bits in the antenna port type field may be larger, which is equivalent to indicating the target cell group more flexibly.
选项3:Option 3:
终端设备在同一个信令中通过第一域指示所述第一信令对应哪个小区组(T个小区组中的哪个),记为小区组t。和选项1相比,可以更灵活地指示小区组,从而为网络调度优化提供更大空间。和选项2相比,可以使用更多的场景,因为选项2只能适用UL-SCH indicator取值为0的场景。In the same signaling, the terminal device indicates through the first field which cell group (which of the T cell groups) the first signaling corresponds to, which is denoted as cell group t. Compared with option 1, the cell group can be indicated more flexibly, thus providing more room for network scheduling optimization. Compared with option 2, more scenarios can be used, because option 2 can only be applied to scenarios where the UL-SCH indicator value is 0.
可选的,所述第一域与非周期SRS触发信令在同一个DCI信令中(第一信令)。Optionally, the first field and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are in the same DCI signaling (first signaling).
可选的,所述第一域是一个新增的域,其是否存在,有网络RRC信令配置。Optionally, the first domain is a newly added domain, and whether it exists or not is configured by network RRC signaling.
可选的,所述第一信令通过DCI Format 0_1,或DCI Format 0_2,或者DCI Format 1_1,或DCI Format 1_2指示。Optionally, the first signaling is indicated by DCI Format 0_1, or DCI Format 0_2, or DCI Format 1_1, or DCI Format 1_2.
步骤3:应理解,实施例3中的步骤3可参考实施例1中的步骤3,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 3: It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 3, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 1, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
上面结合实施例1至实施例3对第一指示信息用于触发SRS资源组对应的SRS的方案进行了说明,下面结合实施例4至实施例6对所述第一指示信息用于触发SRS资源对应的SRS进行说明。The solution in which the first indication information is used to trigger the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group has been described above with reference to Embodiment 1 to Embodiment 3. The following describes the first indication information used to trigger the SRS resource in combination with Embodiment 4 to Embodiment 6. The corresponding SRS is described.
实施例4:Example 4:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对所述第一小区或所述第一BWP配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for the first cell or the first BWP.
步骤1:step 1:
终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
例如,小区聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)配置信息。其中配置有A个小区。针对A个小区中的1个或多个(记为B,B<=A)中的每一个小区(部分情况下,可能有的小区不配置对应的非周期SRS,因此写成A中的1个或多个),网络设备通过RRC信令携带SRS配置信息,配置1个或多个SRS资源组,每个SRS资源组包含1个或多个SRS资源。下面描述是针对B个小区中的某个小区进行描述,不同小区上的配置可以独立。下面以小区Z为例来描述。For example, cell aggregation (Carrier Aggregation, CA) configuration information. A cells are configured therein. For each cell in one or more of the A cells (denoted as B, B<=A) (in some cases, some cells may not be configured with the corresponding aperiodic SRS, so it is written as one of A or more), the network device carries the SRS configuration information through RRC signaling, and configures one or more SRS resource groups, and each SRS resource group includes one or more SRS resources. The following description is for a certain cell in the B cells, and the configurations on different cells may be independent. The following description takes the cell Z as an example.
可选的,所述SRS资源组通过RRC信令SRS-PosResourceSet-r16配置,所述SRS资源通过RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16配置。Optionally, the SRS resource group is configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResourceSet-r16, and the SRS resources are configured through RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16.
可选的,针对至少一个所述SRS资源组(记为Set X)配置有多个(记为M个,M>=1)触发状态。可选的,每个触发状态对应非周期SRS触发信令中SRS请求域的一个取值,即一个码点(code point)。例如表1的触发状态的取值。Optionally, at least one of the SRS resource groups (denoted as Set X) is configured with multiple (denoted as M, M>=1) trigger states. Optionally, each trigger state corresponds to a value of the SRS request field in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, that is, a code point. For example, the value of the trigger state in Table 1.
可选的,多个触发状态通过SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16来配置。Optionally, multiple trigger states are configured through aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 in SRS-PosResourceSet-r16.
可选的,aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16中每个元素的取值为1到N-1的一个整数。Optionally, the value of each element in aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 is an integer ranging from 1 to N-1.
例如,N可以等于非周期SRS触发状态数目(maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates),取值为4。For example, N may be equal to the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states (maxNrofSRS-TriggerStates), which is 4.
再如,根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定N的取值为4或更大值(例如,8或16);当然,在其他可替代实施例中,可采用其他命名。通过增加非周期SRS触发信令所对应的状态数,可以提高DCI触发非周期SRS的灵活性,提高系统性能,从而可以实现跨小区触发非周期SRS,降低DCI开销,增加系统灵活性。For another example, the value of N is determined to be 4 or greater (eg, 8 or 16) according to the configuration information sent by the network device; of course, in other alternative embodiments, other names may be used. By increasing the number of states corresponding to the aperiodic SRS triggering signaling, the flexibility of triggering the aperiodic SRS by the DCI can be improved, and the system performance can be improved, thereby enabling the triggering of the aperiodic SRS across cells, reducing the DCI overhead, and increasing the system flexibility.
可选的,所述配置信息通过RRC信令,或者MAC CE信令指示终端设备。Optionally, the configuration information indicates the terminal equipment through RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling.
可选的,终端设备通过终端设备能力上报信息通知网络设备可以支持更多的非周期SRS触发状态(Maximum number of SRS trigger states),即N大于4,以便网络设备基于终端设备上报的能力确定N。Optionally, the terminal device informs the network device through the terminal device capability reporting information that it can support more aperiodic SRS trigger states (Maximum number of SRS trigger states), that is, N is greater than 4, so that the network device determines N based on the capability reported by the terminal device. .
可选的,所述RRC信令通过SRS-Config配置Optionally, the RRC signaling is configured through SRS-Config
步骤2:应理解,实施例4中的步骤2可参见实施例1中的步骤2,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 2: It should be understood that, for Step 2 in Embodiment 4, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 1, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤3:Step 3:
终端设备在小区Z上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(记为第一信令),所述第一信令对应的触发状态大于0(其取值记为value,简称为第一取值),即非零触发状态,则在前述确定的小区上发送对应的非周期SRS。The terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (referred to as the first signaling) on cell Z, and the trigger state corresponding to the first signaling is greater than 0 (the value of which is recorded as value, referred to as the first value for short) , that is, a non-zero trigger state, the corresponding aperiodic SRS is sent on the cell determined above.
针对上述确定的小区中的每一个小区上(记为Z’),可以包括小区Z在内,发送第一信令取值value对应的SRS资源组对应的非周期SRS,由于在Z’上的非周期SRS资源组里面配置有触发状态,因此每个Z’上会有和第一信令取值value对应的非周期SRS资源组。对应的SRS资源配置有1个时隙偏移(slot offset)或多个时隙偏移For each cell (denoted as Z') in the above determined cells, the aperiodic SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group corresponding to the value of the first signaling may be sent, including the cell Z. A trigger state is configured in the aperiodic SRS resource group, so each Z' has an aperiodic SRS resource group corresponding to the first signaling value value. The corresponding SRS resource is configured with 1 slot offset (slot offset) or multiple slot offsets
可选的,终端设备在小区Z的时隙slot n上接收到非周期SRS触发信令(例如DCI),终端设备根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移确定小区Z’对应的slot n’上传输SRS资源。Optionally, the terminal device receives aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (such as DCI) on the time slot slot n of the cell Z, and the terminal device determines the transmission on the slot n' corresponding to the cell Z' according to the time slot offset corresponding to the SRS resource. SRS resources.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),确定的SRS的发送slot,即slot n’。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple time slot offsets), determine the transmission slot of the SRS, that is, slot n'.
例如,可参见实施例1中涉及的公式确定所述slot n’。For example, the slot n' can be determined with reference to the formula involved in Example 1.
可选的,根据SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置1个时隙偏移的情况下,或在激活了一个时隙偏移的情况下),或者MAC信令激活的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置有1个或多个时隙偏移的情况下),或者非周期SRS触发信令指示的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k(在SRS资源配置多个时隙偏移的情况下),非周期SRS触发信令所在时隙之后的在小区Z’上的第k个或者第k+1个有效时隙为slot n’。由此,可以更灵活地触发非周期SRS,减少响应非周期SRS触发信令拥挤概率。可选的,所述有效时隙为可以传输所述SRS的时隙。Optionally, according to the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource (in the case that the SRS resource is configured with 1 time slot offset, or when one time slot offset is activated), or the SRS activated by the MAC signaling The time slot offset k corresponding to the resource (when the SRS resource is configured with one or more time slot offsets), or the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource indicated by the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling (in the case of the SRS resource In the case of configuring multiple timeslot offsets), the kth or k+1th effective timeslot on cell Z' after the timeslot where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located is slot n'. In this way, the aperiodic SRS can be triggered more flexibly, and the probability of signaling congestion in response to the aperiodic SRS triggering is reduced. Optionally, the valid time slot is a time slot that can transmit the SRS.
实施例5:Example 5:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对非周期SRS触发状态配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for an aperiodic SRS trigger state.
步骤1:终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。Step 1: The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例5中的步骤1可参考实施例4中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that for step 1 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:应理解,实施例5中的步骤2可参见实施例2中的步骤2,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 2: It should be understood that, for Step 2 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 2. In order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤3:应理解,实施例5中的步骤3可参见实施例4中的步骤3,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 3: It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
实施例6:Example 6:
本实施例中,所述第三指示信息是针对所述终端设备或包括所述第一小区的小区组配置的。In this embodiment, the third indication information is configured for the terminal device or a cell group including the first cell.
步骤1:终端设备接收网络设备通过RRC信令发送的小区配置信息。Step 1: The terminal device receives the cell configuration information sent by the network device through RRC signaling.
应理解,实施例5中的步骤1可参考实施例3中的步骤1,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that, for step 1 in Embodiment 5, reference may be made to Step 1 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤2:应理解,实施例6中的步骤2可参见实施例3中的步骤2,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 2: It should be understood that for Step 2 in Embodiment 6, reference may be made to Step 2 in Embodiment 3, and to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
步骤3:应理解,实施例6中的步骤3可参见实施例4中的步骤3,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。Step 3: It should be understood that for Step 3 in Embodiment 6, reference may be made to Step 3 in Embodiment 4, and in order to avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
上文结合图2至图16,详细描述了本申请的方法实施例,下文结合图17至图20,详细描述本申请的装置实施例。The method embodiments of the present application are described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 2 to 16 , and the apparatus embodiments of the present application are described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20 .
图17是本申请实施例的终端设备300的示意性框图。FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图17所示,所述终端设备300可包括:As shown in FIG. 17 , the terminal device 300 may include:
接收单元310,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。The receiving unit 310 is configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine a target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the target cell group SRS on the active cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息和所述非周期SRS触发信令位于同一信令内,所述第一指示信息通过所述同一信令中的第一域指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令中上行链路共享信道UL-SCH指示的取值为0,所述第一域包括以下域中至少一个域的部分或全部比特位;In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
载波指示域;carrier indication field;
BWP指示域;BWP indication field;
频域资源分配域;frequency domain resource allocation domain;
时域资源分配域;Time domain resource allocation domain;
调制编码方案域;modulation coding scheme field;
冗余版本域;Redundant version field;
混合自动重传请求HARQ进程号域;Hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process ID field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域;The transmit power control TPC command field for the predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示域;SRS resource indication field;
预编码信息和层数域;或precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型域。Antenna port type field.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域为所述第一指示信息专用的域。In some embodiments of the present application, the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域是否存在通过第一RRC信令确定。In some embodiments of the present application, whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过第二RRC信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information is carried through second RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Sending capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示至少一个小区组,所述至少一个小区组包括所述目标小区组。Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应所述第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应至少一个触发状态,所述至少一个触发状态包括所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state, and the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应终端设备或所述终端设备的第一小区组,其中,所述终端设备的所述第一小区或所述第一小区组中的所述第一小区上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述终端设备或所述第一小区组对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过第三RRC信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过以下中的至少一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
小区组CellGroupConfig。Cell group CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过位图或小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令包括至少一个比特组,所述至少一个比特组中的一个比特组对应所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组,所述一个比特组中的一个比特位上的取值用于指示所述一个比特位对应的小区是否属于所述一个比特组对应的小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the one bit group The value of one bit in is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;或first information for indicating the number of the at least one cell group; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令包括所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;first information, used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group;
第二信息,一个所述第二信息用于指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的数量,或一个所述第二信息用于指示一个小区组中小区的数量;second information, one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
第三信息,一个第三信息用于指示一个小区标识指示的小区所属的小区组;或third information, one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组的数量为预定义的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为网络设备指示的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为终端设备根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
接收第四RRC信令,所述第四RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。Fourth RRC signaling is received, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of the different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in the different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS -Resource signaling configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located The SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offsets Active slot offset in .
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups. SRS Pos Resource Version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for the multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述接收单元310还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the receiving unit 310 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;A third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger The time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offset k' Activated slot offsets in slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图17所示的终端设备300可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法200中的相应主体,并且终端设备300中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the terminal device 300 shown in FIG. 17 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the terminal device 300 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
图18是本申请实施例提供的网络设备400的示意性框图。FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a network device 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图18所示,所述网络设备400可包括:As shown in FIG. 18, the network device 400 may include:
发送单元410,用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。The sending unit 410 is configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine a target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the target cell group SRS on the active cell.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一指示信息和所述非周期SRS触发信令位于同一信令内,所述第一指示信息通过所述同一信令中的第一域指示所述目标小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information indicates the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令中上行链路共享信道UL-SCH指示的取值为0,所述第一域包括以下域中至少一个域的部分或全部比特位;In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of the bits of at least one of the following fields;
载波指示域;carrier indication field;
BWP指示域;BWP indication field;
频域资源分配域;frequency domain resource allocation domain;
时域资源分配域;Time domain resource allocation domain;
调制编码方案域;modulation coding scheme field;
冗余版本域;Redundant version field;
混合自动重传请求HARQ进程号域;Hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process ID field;
用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域;The transmit power control TPC command field for the predetermined PUSCH;
SRS资源指示域;SRS resource indication field;
预编码信息和层数域;或precoding information and number of layers fields; or
天线端口类型域。Antenna port type field.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域为所述第一指示信息专用的域。In some embodiments of the present application, the first domain is a domain dedicated to the first indication information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2。In some embodiments of the present application, the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一域是否存在通过第一RRC信令确定。In some embodiments of the present application, whether the first domain exists is determined through the first RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二指示信息通过第二RRC信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the second indication information is carried through second RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示至少一个小区组,所述至少一个小区组包括所述目标小区组。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应所述第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein all the cells on the first cell or the first BWP The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应至少一个触发状态,所述至少一个触发状态包括所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state, and the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein the first cell Or the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组对应终端设备或所述终端设备的第一小区组,其中,所述终端设 备的所述第一小区或所述第一小区组中的所述第一小区上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述终端设备或所述第一小区组对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal device or a first cell group of the terminal device, wherein the first cell of the terminal device or a cell in the first cell group The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过第三RRC信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过以下中的至少一项配置:In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
小区组CellGroupConfig。Cell group CellGroupConfig.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三RRC信令通过位图或小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三指示信息通过媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE信令承载。In some embodiments of the present application, the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element MAC CE signaling.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令包括至少一个比特组,所述至少一个比特组中的一个比特组对应所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组,所述一个比特组中的一个比特位上的取值用于指示所述一个比特位对应的小区是否属于所述一个比特组对应的小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling includes at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the one bit group The value of one bit in is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;或first information for indicating the number of the at least one cell group; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令通过小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令包括所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识。In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:In some embodiments of the present application, the MAC CE signaling further includes at least one of the following:
所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;first information, used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group;
第二信息,一个所述第二信息用于指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的数量,或一个所述第二信息用于指示一个小区组中小区的数量;second information, one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
第三信息,一个第三信息用于指示一个小区标识指示的小区所属的小区组;或third information, one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs; or
预留比特。reserved bits.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组的数量为预定义的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为网络设备指示的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为终端设备根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by the network device, or the number of the at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the The configuration information sent by the network device is determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。In some embodiments of the present application, the maximum number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
发送第四RRC信令,所述第四RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。Send fourth RRC signaling, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
在本申请的一些实施例中,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resources SRS-Resource Signaling configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。In some embodiments of the present application, for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS resource group information element SRS-ResourceSet IE The aperiodic SRS resource triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or the aperiodicSRS resource trigger list aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList for configuring one or more than one trigger state of the plurality of non-zero trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located The SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offsets Active slot offset in .
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the second time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
在本申请的一些实施例中,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16 SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling, and the SRS resources of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource groups are configured through different SRS-Pos resource groups. SRS Pos Resource Version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through the SRS configuration SRS-Config.
在本申请的一些实施例中,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。In some embodiments of the present application, for the multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 in the Periodic SRS Resource Trigger List Version 16 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。In some embodiments of the present application, the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。In some embodiments of the present application, the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is reported to the terminal device based on the The capabilities of the network device are determined.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述发送单元410还用于:In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the sending unit 410 is further configured to:
基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;A third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger The time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
在所述一个小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offset k' Activated slot offsets in slot offsets.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。In some embodiments of the present application, the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。In some embodiments of the present application, the third time slot is a valid time slot after the first time slot, and the valid time slot is a time slot that can be used to transmit SRS.
应理解,装置实施例与方法实施例可以相互对应,类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。具体地,图18所示的网络设备400可以对应于执行本申请实施例的方法200中的相应主体,并且网络设备400中的各个单元的前述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的各个方法中的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus embodiments and the method embodiments may correspond to each other, and similar descriptions may refer to the method embodiments. Specifically, the network device 400 shown in FIG. 18 may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method 200 of the embodiment of the present application, and the aforementioned and other operations and/or functions of the various units in the network device 400 are respectively for the purpose of realizing the method shown in FIG. 2 . For the sake of brevity, the corresponding processes in each of the methods are not repeated here.
上文中结合附图从功能模块的角度描述了本申请实施例的通信设备。应理解,该功能模块可以通过硬件形式实现,也可以通过软件形式的指令实现,还可以通过硬件和软件模块组合实现。The communication device of the embodiments of the present application is described above from the perspective of functional modules with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that the functional modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, can also be implemented by instructions in the form of software, and can also be implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules.
具体地,本申请实施例中的方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路和/或软件形式的指令完成,结合本申请实施例公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。Specifically, the steps of the method embodiments in the embodiments of the present application may be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor and/or instructions in the form of software, and the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as hardware The execution of the decoding processor is completed, or the execution is completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
可选地,软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域的成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法实施例中的步骤。Optionally, the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps in the above method embodiments in combination with its hardware.
例如,上文涉及的接收单元或发送单元可通过收发器实现。For example, the receiving unit or the transmitting unit referred to above may be implemented by a transceiver.
图19是本申请实施例的通信设备500示意性结构图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图19所示,所述通信设备500可包括处理器510。As shown in FIG. 19 , the communication device 500 may include a processor 510 .
其中,处理器510可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。The processor 510 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
请继续参见图19,通信设备500还可以包括存储器520。Continuing to refer to FIG. 19 , the communication device 500 may further include a memory 520 .
其中,该存储器520可以用于存储指示信息,还可以用于存储处理器510执行的代码、指令等。其中,处理器510可以从存储器520中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。存储器520可以是独立于处理器510的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器510中。Wherein, the memory 520 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions, etc. executed by the processor 510 . The processor 510 may call and run a computer program from the memory 520 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application. The memory 520 may be a separate device independent of the processor 510 , or may be integrated in the processor 510 .
请继续参见图19,通信设备500还可以包括收发器530。Continuing to refer to FIG. 19 , the communication device 500 may further include a transceiver 530 .
其中,处理器510可以控制该收发器530与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。收发器530可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器530还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。The processor 510 may control the transceiver 530 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices. Transceiver 530 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 530 may further include antennas, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
应当理解,该通信设备500中的各个组件通过总线系统相连,其中,总线系统除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。It should be understood that each component in the communication device 500 is connected through a bus system, wherein the bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
还应理解,该通信设备500可为本申请实施例的终端设备,并且该通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,也就是说,本申请实施例的通信设备500可对应于本申请实施例中的终端设备400或终端设备600,并可以对应于执行根据本申请实施例的方法中的相应主体,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。类似地,该通信设备500可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备500可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程。也就是说,本申请实施例的通信设备500可对应于本申请实施例中的网络设备500或网络设备700,并可以对应于执行根据本申请实施例的方法中的相应主体,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should also be understood that the communication device 500 may be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 500 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. The communication device 500 may correspond to the terminal device 400 or the terminal device 600 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application, which is not repeated here for brevity. Similarly, the communication device 500 may be the network device of the embodiments of the present application, and the communication device 500 may implement corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. That is to say, the communication device 500 in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the network device 500 or the network device 700 in the embodiment of the present application, and may correspond to the corresponding subject in executing the method according to the embodiment of the present application. This will not be repeated here.
此外,本申请实施例中还提供了一种芯片。In addition, the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip.
例如,芯片可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、 步骤及逻辑框图。所述芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。可选地,该芯片可应用到各种通信设备中,使得安装有该芯片的通信设备能够执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。For example, the chip may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability, and can implement or execute the methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. The chip may also be referred to as a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip, or the like. Optionally, the chip can be applied to various communication devices, so that the communication device installed with the chip can execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
图20是根据本申请实施例的芯片600的示意性结构图。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图20所示,所述芯片600包括处理器610。As shown in FIG. 20 , the chip 600 includes a processor 610 .
其中,处理器610可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。The processor 610 may call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application.
请继续参见图20,所述芯片600还可以包括存储器620。Please continue to refer to FIG. 20 , the chip 600 may further include a memory 620 .
其中,处理器610可以从存储器620中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。该存储器620可以用于存储指示信息,还可以用于存储处理器610执行的代码、指令等。存储器620可以是独立于处理器610的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器610中。The processor 610 may call and run a computer program from the memory 620 to implement the methods in the embodiments of the present application. The memory 620 may be used to store instruction information, and may also be used to store codes, instructions and the like executed by the processor 610 . The memory 620 may be a separate device independent of the processor 610 , or may be integrated in the processor 610 .
请继续参见图20,所述芯片600还可以包括输入接口630。Please continue to refer to FIG. 20 , the chip 600 may further include an input interface 630 .
其中,处理器610可以控制该输入接口630与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。The processor 610 may control the input interface 630 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may acquire information or data sent by other devices or chips.
请继续参见图20,所述芯片600还可以包括输出接口640。Please continue to refer to FIG. 20 , the chip 600 may further include an output interface 640 .
其中,处理器610可以控制该输出接口640与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。The processor 610 can control the output interface 640 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, can output information or data to other devices or chips.
应理解,所述芯片600可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,也可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the chip 600 can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application, and can also implement the various methods in the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, the corresponding process implemented by the terminal device in FIG. 1 is not repeated here.
还应理解,该芯片600中的各个组件通过总线系统相连,其中,总线系统除包括数据总线之外,还包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线。It should also be understood that various components in the chip 600 are connected through a bus system, wherein the bus system includes a power bus, a control bus and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
上文涉及的处理器可以包括但不限于:The processors referred to above may include, but are not limited to:
通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等等。General-purpose processor, Digital Signal Processor (DSP), Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates Or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and so on.
所述处理器可以用于实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。The processor may be used to implement or execute the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of this application. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
上文涉及的存储器包括但不限于:The memory mentioned above includes but is not limited to:
易失性存储器和/或非易失性存储器。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。Volatile memory and/or non-volatile memory. Wherein, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static RAM (SRAM), Dynamic RAM (DRAM), Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM).
应注意,本文描述的存储器旨在包括这些和其它任意适合类型的存储器。It should be noted that the memory described herein is intended to include these and any other suitable types of memory.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。该计算机可读存储介质存储一个或多个程序,该一个或多个程序包括指令,该指令当被包括多个应用程序的便携式电子设备执行时,能够使该便携式电子设备执行方法200所示实施例的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program. The computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by a portable electronic device including a plurality of application programs, enable the portable electronic device to perform the implementation shown in method 200 example method.
可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For brevity, here No longer.
可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. , and are not repeated here for brevity.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, including a computer program.
可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. Repeat.
可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的移动终端/终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由移动终端/终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the mobile terminal/terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the mobile terminal/terminal device in each method of the embodiments of the present application, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种计算机程序。当该计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得计算机可以执行方法200所示实施例的方法。A computer program is also provided in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can execute the method of the embodiment shown in method 200 .
可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program is run on the computer, it causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity. , and will not be repeated here.
此外,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统可以包括上述涉及的终端设备和网络设备,以形成如图1所示的通信系统100,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。需要说明的是,本文中的术语“系统”等也可以称为“网络管理架构”或者“网络系统”等。In addition, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which may include the above-mentioned terminal equipment and network equipment to form a communication system 100 as shown in FIG. 1 , which is not repeated here for brevity. It should be noted that the terms "system" and the like in this document may also be referred to as "network management architecture" or "network system" and the like.
还应当理解,在本申请实施例和所附权利要求书中使用的术语是仅仅出于描述特定实施例的目的,而非旨在限制本申请实施例。It should also be understood that the terms used in the embodiments of the present application and the appended claims are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the embodiments of the present application.
例如,在本申请实施例和所附权利要求书中所使用的单数形式的“一种”、“所述”、“上述”和“该”也旨在包括多数形式,除非上下文清楚地表示其他含义。For example, as used in the embodiments of this application and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "the," "above," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. meaning.
所属领域的技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请实施例的范围。Those skilled in the art can realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Experts may use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that make contributions to the prior art or the parts of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other manners.
例如,以上所描述的装置实施例中单元或模块或组件的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如,多个单元或模块或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些单元或模块或组件可以忽略,或不执行。For example, the division of units, modules or components in the apparatus embodiments described above is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation. For example, multiple units, modules or components may be combined or integrated. To another system, or some units or modules or components can be ignored, or not implemented.
又例如,上述作为分离/显示部件说明的单元/模块/组件可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元/模块/组件来实现本申请实施例的目的。For another example, the above-mentioned units/modules/components described as separate/display components may or may not be physically separated, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units/modules/components may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the embodiments of the present application.
最后,需要说明的是,上文中显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。Finally, it should be noted that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed above may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms .
以上内容,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above contents are only specific implementations of the embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto. Changes or substitutions should all be covered within the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (102)

  1. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    接收第一指示信息;receiving first indication information;
    基于所述第一指示信息确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。The target cell group is determined based on the first indication information, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态指示所述目标小区组。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述非周期SRS触发信令位于同一信令内,所述第一指示信息通过所述同一信令中的第一域指示所述目标小区组。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information is passed through the first indication in the same signaling. field indicates the target cell group.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令中上行链路共享信道UL-SCH指示的取值为0,所述第一域包括以下域中至少一个域的部分或全部比特位;The method according to claim 3, wherein the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of at least one of the following fields bits;
    载波指示域;carrier indication field;
    BWP指示域;BWP indication field;
    频域资源分配域;frequency domain resource allocation domain;
    时域资源分配域;Time domain resource allocation domain;
    调制编码方案域;modulation coding scheme field;
    冗余版本域;Redundant version field;
    混合自动重传请求HARQ进程号域;Hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process ID field;
    用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域;The transmit power control TPC command field for the predetermined PUSCH;
    SRS资源指示域;SRS resource indication field;
    预编码信息和层数域;或precoding information and number of layers fields; or
    天线端口类型域。Antenna port type field.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。The method according to claim 4, wherein the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一域为所述第一指示信息专用的域。The method according to claim 3, wherein the first field is a field dedicated to the first indication information.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2。The method according to claim 6, wherein the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一域是否存在通过第一RRC信令确定。The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein whether the first domain exists is determined through first RRC signaling.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过第二RRC信令承载。The method according to claim 9, wherein the second indication information is carried by second RRC signaling.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。Sending capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示至少一个小区组,所述至少一个小区组包括所述目标小区组。Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应所述第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 12, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein the first cell or the first The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应至少一个触发状态,所述至少一个触发状态包括所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state, and the at least one trigger state includes a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein , the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。The method according to claim 14, wherein the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  16. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应终端设备或所述终端设备的第一小区组,其中,所述终端设备的所述第一小区或所述第一小区组中的所述第一小区上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述终端设备或所述第一小区组对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 12, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal equipment or a first cell group of the terminal equipment, wherein the first cell of the terminal equipment or the first cell group of the terminal equipment The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell in the cell group triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
  17. 根据权利要求12至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息通过第三RRC信令承载。The method according to any one of claims 12 to 16, wherein the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三RRC信令通过以下中的至少一项配置:The method according to claim 17, wherein the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
    小区组CellGroupConfig。Cell group CellGroupConfig.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三RRC信令通过位图或小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  20. 根据权利要求12至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息通过媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE信令承载。The method according to any one of claims 12 to 16, wherein the third indication information is carried by medium access control control element (MAC CE) signaling.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组。The method according to claim 20, wherein the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令包括至少一个比特组,所述至少一个比特组中的一个比特组对应所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组,所述一个比特组中的一个比特位上的取值用于指示所述一个比特位对应的小区是否属于所述一个比特组对应的小区组。The method according to claim 21, wherein the MAC CE signaling comprises at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the The value of one bit in the one bit group is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:The method according to claim 22, wherein the MAC CE signaling further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
    所述第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP;
    第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;或first information for indicating the number of the at least one cell group; or
    预留比特。reserved bits.
  24. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令通过小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。The method according to claim 20, wherein the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令包括所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识。The method of claim 24, wherein the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:The method of claim 25, wherein the MAC CE signaling further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
    所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
    第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;first information, used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group;
    第二信息,一个所述第二信息用于指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的数量,或一个所述第二信息用于指示一个小区组中小区的数量;second information, one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
    第三信息,一个第三信息用于指示一个小区标识指示的小区所属的小区组;或third information, one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs; or
    预留比特。reserved bits.
  27. 根据权利要求12至26中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组的数量为预定义的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为网络设备指示的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为终端设备根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 12 to 26, wherein the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by a network device, or the The number of at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the configuration information sent by the network device.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method of claim 27, wherein the maximum number of cells in each of the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  29. 根据权利要求1至28中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 28, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第四RRC信令,所述第四RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。Fourth RRC signaling is received, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 29, wherein the SRS resource groups of the different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and the SRS resources in the different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resource groups. SRS resource SRS-Resource signaling configuration.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 30, wherein the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  32. 根据权利要求30或31所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 30 or 31, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS resource group information AperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger in the element SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states , the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states in the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 32, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 33, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  35. 根据权利要求30至34中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 30 to 34, wherein the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located The SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述一个小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 35, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a plurality of time slot offsets, and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the plurality of time slot offsets Activated slot offset in slot offset.
  37. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 35, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  38. 根据权利要求35至37中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 35 to 37, wherein the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  39. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 29, wherein SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling of different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16, and SRSs of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group The resources are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 39, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  41. 根据权利要求39或40所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版 aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 39 or 40, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS- AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 41, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 42, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  44. 根据权利要求39至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 39 to 43, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further include:
    基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;A third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger The time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述一个小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 44, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  46. 根据权利要求44所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 44, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  47. 根据权利要求44至46中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 44 to 46, wherein the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  48. 一种无线通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A wireless communication method, comprising:
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于确定目标小区组,其中,第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发所述目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。Send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to determine the target cell group, wherein the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group .
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息通过所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态指示所述目标小区组。The method according to claim 48, wherein the first indication information indicates the target cell group through a first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling.
  50. 根据权利要求48所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述非周期SRS触发信令位于同一信令内,所述第一指示信息通过所述同一信令中的第一域指示所述目标小区组。The method according to claim 48, wherein the first indication information and the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling are located in the same signaling, and the first indication information is passed through the first indication in the same signaling. field indicates the target cell group.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令中上行链路共享信道UL-SCH指示的取值为0,所述第一域包括以下域中至少一个域的部分或全部比特位;The method according to claim 50, wherein the value of the uplink shared channel UL-SCH indication in the same signaling is 0, and the first field includes part or all of at least one of the following fields bits;
    载波指示域;carrier indication field;
    BWP指示域;BWP indication field;
    频域资源分配域;frequency domain resource allocation domain;
    时域资源分配域;Time domain resource allocation domain;
    调制编码方案域;modulation coding scheme field;
    冗余版本域;Redundant version field;
    混合自动重传请求HARQ进程号域;Hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process ID field;
    用于预定的PUSCH的发射功率控制TPC命令域;The transmit power control TPC command field for the predetermined PUSCH;
    SRS资源指示域;SRS resource indication field;
    预编码信息和层数域;或precoding information and number of layers fields; or
    天线端口类型域。Antenna port type field.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1或DCI格式0_2。The method according to claim 51, wherein the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1 or DCI format 0_2.
  53. 根据权利要求50所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一域为所述第一指示信息专用的域。The method according to claim 50, wherein the first field is a field dedicated to the first indication information.
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的方法,其特征在于,所述同一信令为下行控制信息DCI格式0_1、或DCI格式0_2、DCI格式1_1、或DCI格式1_2。The method according to claim 53, wherein the same signaling is downlink control information DCI format 0_1, or DCI format 0_2, DCI format 1_1, or DCI format 1_2.
  55. 根据权利要求53或54所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一域是否存在通过第一RRC信令确定。The method according to claim 53 or 54, wherein whether the first domain exists is determined through first RRC signaling.
  56. 根据权利要求48至55中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 48 to 55, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于确定是否基于小区组触发小区上的SRS。Send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to determine whether to trigger the SRS on the cell based on the cell group.
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息通过第二RRC信令承载。The method according to claim 56, wherein the second indication information is carried by second RRC signaling.
  58. 根据权利要求48至57中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 48 to 57, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备具备基于小区组触发小区上的SRS的能力。receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal device has the capability of triggering an SRS on a cell based on a cell group.
  59. 根据权利要求48至58中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 48 to 58, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示至少一个小区组,所述至少一个小区组包括所述目标小区组。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate at least one cell group, and the at least one cell group includes the target cell group.
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应所述第一小区或所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一小区或所述第一BWP对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method of claim 59, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to the first cell or a first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell, wherein the first cell or the first The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the first cell or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first BWP.
  61. 根据权利要求59或60所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应至少一个触发状态,所述至少一个触发状态包括所述非周期SRS触发信令中的第一触发状态,其中,所述第一小区或所述第一BWP上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述第一触发状态对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 59 or 60, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to at least one trigger state, and the at least one trigger state includes the first trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling, wherein , the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell or the first BWP triggers the SRS on the cell based on the cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first trigger state.
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一触发状态为非零触发状态。The method of claim 61, wherein the first trigger state is a non-zero trigger state.
  63. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组对应终端设备或所述终端设备的第一小区组,其中,所述终端设备的所述第一小区或所述第一小区组中的所述第一小区上的所述非周期SRS触发信令,基于所述终端设备或所述第一小区组对应的所述至少一个小区组中的小区组触发小区上的SRS。The method according to claim 59, wherein the at least one cell group corresponds to a terminal equipment or a first cell group of the terminal equipment, wherein the first cell of the terminal equipment or the first cell group of the terminal equipment The aperiodic SRS trigger signaling on the first cell in the cell group triggers the SRS on the cell based on the terminal device or a cell group in the at least one cell group corresponding to the first cell group.
  64. 根据权利要求59至63中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息通过第三RRC信令承载。The method according to any one of claims 59 to 63, wherein the third indication information is carried by third RRC signaling.
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三RRC信令通过以下中的至少一项配置:The method according to claim 64, wherein the third RRC signaling is configured by at least one of the following:
    SRS配置SRS-Config;SRS configuration SRS-Config;
    服务小区配置ServingCellConfig;Serving cell configuration ServingCellConfig;
    特殊小区配置SpCellConfig;Special cell configuration SpCellConfig;
    辅小区配置SCellConfig;Secondary cell configuration SCellConfig;
    服务小区共享配置ServingCellConfigCommon;Serving cell shared configuration ServingCellConfigCommon;
    上行链路配置UplinkConfig;Uplink configuration UplinkConfig;
    带宽部分上行链路BWP-Uplink;Bandwidth Part Uplink BWP-Uplink;
    带宽部分共享上行链路BWP-UplinkCommon;The bandwidth part shares the uplink BWP-UplinkCommon;
    带宽部分专用上行链路BWP-UplinkDedicated;或Bandwidth Part Dedicated Uplink BWP-UplinkDedicated; or
    小区组CellGroupConfig。Cell group CellGroupConfig.
  66. 根据权利要求64或65所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三RRC信令通过位图或小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。The method according to claim 64 or 65, wherein the third RRC signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap or a cell identifier.
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三指示信息通过媒体接入控制控制元素MAC CE信令承载。The method according to claim 66, wherein the third indication information is carried by medium access control element (MAC CE) signaling.
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令通过位图指示所述至少一个小区组。The method of claim 67, wherein the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a bitmap.
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令包括至少一个比特组,所述至少一个比特组中的一个比特组对应所述至少一个小区组中的一个小区组,所述一个比特组中的一个比特位上的取值用于指示所述一个比特位对应的小区是否属于所述一个比特组对应的小区组。The method according to claim 68, wherein the MAC CE signaling comprises at least one bit group, one bit group in the at least one bit group corresponds to one cell group in the at least one cell group, and the The value of one bit in the one bit group is used to indicate whether the cell corresponding to the one bit bit belongs to the cell group corresponding to the one bit group.
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:The method of claim 69, wherein the MAC CE signaling further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
    所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
    第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;或first information for indicating the number of the at least one cell group; or
    预留比特。reserved bits.
  71. 根据权利要求68所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令通过小区标识指示所述至少一个小区组。The method of claim 68, wherein the MAC CE signaling indicates the at least one cell group through a cell identity.
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令包括所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中的小区的标识。The method of claim 71, wherein the MAC CE signaling includes an identity of a cell in each of the at least one cell group.
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的方法,其特征在于,所述MAC CE信令还包括以下中的至少一项:The method of claim 72, wherein the MAC CE signaling further comprises at least one of the following:
    所述第一小区的标识;the identifier of the first cell;
    所述第一小区的第一带宽部分BWP的标识;the identifier of the first bandwidth part BWP of the first cell;
    第一信息,用于指示所述至少一个小区组的数量;first information, used to indicate the number of the at least one cell group;
    第二信息,一个所述第二信息用于指示所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的数量,或一个所述第二信息用于指示一个小区组中小区的数量;second information, one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in each cell group in the at least one cell group, or one of the second information is used to indicate the number of cells in a cell group;
    第三信息,一个第三信息用于指示一个小区标识指示的小区所属的小区组;或third information, one piece of third information is used to indicate a cell group to which a cell indicated by a cell identifier belongs; or
    预留比特。reserved bits.
  74. 根据权利要求59至73中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组的数量为预定义的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为网络设备指示的,或所述至少一个小区组的数量为终端设备根据网络设备发送的配置信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 59 to 73, wherein the number of the at least one cell group is predefined, or the number of the at least one cell group is indicated by a network device, or the The number of at least one cell group is determined by the terminal device according to the configuration information sent by the network device.
  75. 根据权利要求74所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个小区组中每一个小区组中小区的最大数量为2、4、8或32。The method of claim 74, wherein the maximum number of cells in each of the at least one cell group is 2, 4, 8 or 32.
  76. 根据权利要求48至75中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 48 to 75, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第四RRC信令,所述第四RRC信令用于配置至少一个小区,所述至少一个小区包括所述第一小区和所述目标小区组中的小区。Send fourth RRC signaling, where the fourth RRC signaling is used to configure at least one cell, where the at least one cell includes the first cell and cells in the target cell group.
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的方法,其特征在于,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS资源组SRS-ResourceSet信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组中的SRS资源通过不同的SRS资源SRS-Resource信令配置。The method according to claim 76, wherein SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through different SRS resource group SRS-ResourceSet signaling, and SRS resources in different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group are configured through different SRS resource groups. Resource SRS-Resource signaling configuration.
  78. 根据权利要求77所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-ResourceSet信令或所述SRS-Resource信令通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 77, wherein the SRS-ResourceSet signaling or the SRS-Resource signaling is configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  79. 根据权利要求77或78所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过SRS资源组信元SRS-ResourceSet IE中的非周期SRS资源触发aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger和/或非周期SRS资源触发列表aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList配置,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个触发状态,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList用于配置所述多个非零触发状态中的一个或多于一个的触发状态。The method according to claim 77 or 78, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS resource group information AperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger in the element SRS-ResourceSet IE triggers aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger and/or aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList configuration, the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is used to configure one of the multiple non-zero trigger states , the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList is used to configure one or more than one trigger states in the multiple non-zero trigger states.
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger的取值为1到N-1中的整数,所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目;所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数。The method according to claim 79, wherein the value of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTrigger is an integer from 1 to N-1, where N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states; each of the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis The value of the element is an integer from 1 to N-1.
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 80, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  82. 根据权利要求77至81中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法包括:The method according to any one of claims 77 to 81, wherein the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group is configured with at least one time slot offset; the method comprises:
    基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k确定所述第二时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;The second time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is where the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling is located time slot, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述一个小区的所述第二时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的SRS。On the second time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组对应的时隙偏移k为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 82, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple timeslot offsets, and the timeslot offset k corresponding to the SRS resource group of the one cell is the multiple timeslot offsets k Activated slot offset in slot offset.
  84. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k。The method according to claim 82, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k.
  85. 根据权利要求82至84中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 82 to 84, wherein the second time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的方法,其特征在于,不同小区的SRS资源组通过不同的SRS-Pos资源组16版SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令配置,所述SRS资源组中不同SRS资源组的SRS资源通过不同的SRS Pos资源16版SRS-PosResource-r16信令配置。The method according to claim 85, wherein SRS resource groups of different cells are configured through SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling of different SRS-Pos resource groups version 16, and SRSs of different SRS resource groups in the SRS resource group The resources are configured through different SRS Pos resource version 16 SRS-PosResource-r16 signaling.
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的方法,其特征在于,所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16信令和SRS-PosResource-r16通过SRS配置SRS-Config配置。The method according to claim 86, wherein the SRS-PosResourceSet-r16 signaling and the SRS-PosResource-r16 are configured through SRS configuration SRS-Config.
  88. 根据权利要求86或87所述的方法,其特征在于,针对所述第一小区的SRS资源组和所述目标小区组中的小区的SRS资源组对应的多个触发状态,通过所述SRS-PosResourceSet-r16中的非周期SRS资源触发列表16版aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16配置。The method according to claim 86 or 87, wherein for multiple trigger states corresponding to the SRS resource group of the first cell and the SRS resource group of the cells in the target cell group, the SRS- AperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerList-r16 configuration in PosResourceSet-r16 for aperiodic SRS resource trigger list version 16.
  89. 根据权利要求88所述的方法,其特征在于,所述aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis中每个元素的取值为1到N-1中的整数;所述N表示非周期SRS触发状态数目。The method according to claim 88, wherein the value of each element in the aperiodicSRS-ResourceTriggerLis is an integer from 1 to N-1; the N represents the number of aperiodic SRS trigger states.
  90. 根据权利要求89所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N大于或等于4;若N大于4,所述N为网络设备指示给所述终端设备的,或者所述N为基于所述终端设备上报给所述网络设备的能力确定的。The method according to claim 89, wherein the N is greater than or equal to 4; if N is greater than 4, the N is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, or the N is based on the terminal device The capability of reporting to the network device is determined.
  91. 根据权利要求86至90中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标小区组中的每一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源配置有至少一个时隙偏移;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 86 to 90, wherein the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of each cell in the target cell group are configured with at least one time slot offset; the method further include:
    基于第一时隙和所述目标小区组中的一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’确定第三时隙,所述第一时隙为所述非周期SRS触发信令所在的时隙,所述一个小区的SRS资源组为第一取值对应的SRS资源组,所述第一取值为所述非周期SRS触发信令中的触发状态的取值;A third time slot is determined based on the first time slot and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of one cell in the target cell group, and the first time slot is the aperiodic SRS trigger The time slot where the signaling is located, the SRS resource group of the one cell is the SRS resource group corresponding to the first value, and the first value is the value of the trigger state in the aperiodic SRS trigger signaling;
    在所述一个小区的所述第三时隙上,发送所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的SRS。On the third time slot of the one cell, the SRS corresponding to the SRS resource in the SRS resource group of the one cell is sent.
  92. 根据权利要求91所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有多个时隙偏移,所述一个小区的SRS资源组中的SRS资源对应的时隙偏移k’为所述多个时隙偏移中已激活的时隙偏移。The method according to claim 91, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with multiple time slot offsets, and the time slot offset k' corresponding to the SRS resources in the SRS resource group of the one cell is an activated slot offset among the plurality of slot offsets.
  93. 根据权利要求91所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个小区的SRS资源组配置有一个时隙偏移,所述一个时隙偏移为所述时隙偏移k’。The method according to claim 91, wherein the SRS resource group of the one cell is configured with a slot offset, and the one slot offset is the slot offset k'.
  94. 根据权利要求91至93中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三时隙为所述第一时隙之后的有效时隙,所述有效时隙为可用于传输SRS的时隙。The method according to any one of claims 91 to 93, wherein the third time slot is an effective time slot after the first time slot, and the effective time slot is a time slot available for transmitting SRS gap.
  95. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized in that it includes:
    接收单元,用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。A receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group.
  96. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized in that it includes:
    发送单元,用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一小区上的非周期探测参考信号SRS触发信令用于触发目标小区组中的活跃小区上的SRS。A sending unit, configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the aperiodic sounding reference signal SRS trigger signaling on the first cell is used to trigger the SRS on the active cell in the target cell group.
  97. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求1至47中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 47.
  98. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器、存储器和收发器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行权利要求48至94中任一项所述的方法。A processor, a memory and a transceiver, the memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and executing the computer program stored in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 48 to 94.
  99. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:A chip, characterized in that it includes:
    处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至47中任一项所述的方法、或如权利要求48至94中任一项所述的方法。A processor for invoking and running a computer program from the memory, so that the device equipped with the chip performs the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 47, or the method as claimed in any one of claims 48 to 94 method described.
  100. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至47中任一项所述的方法、或如权利要求48至94中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by being used for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 47, or any one of claims 48 to 94 method described in item.
  101. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求1至47中任一项所述的方法、或如权利要求48至94中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized by comprising computer program instructions that cause a computer to perform a method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 47 or as claimed in any one of claims 48 to 94 method described.
  102. 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至47中任一项所述的方法、或如权利要求48至94中任一项所述的方法。A computer program, characterized in that the computer program causes a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 47 or the method as claimed in any one of claims 48 to 94.
PCT/CN2020/117812 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device WO2022061733A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/117812 WO2022061733A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device
CN202080102898.7A CN115804204A (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/117812 WO2022061733A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022061733A1 true WO2022061733A1 (en) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80846098

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/117812 WO2022061733A1 (en) 2020-09-25 2020-09-25 Wireless communication method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115804204A (en)
WO (1) WO2022061733A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105122679A (en) * 2013-04-15 2015-12-02 Lg电子株式会社 Methods and devices for transmitting sounding reference signal in wireless access system
WO2016163805A1 (en) * 2015-04-10 2016-10-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for controlling transmission of sounding reference signal in wireless access system supporting machine type communication
CN106255209A (en) * 2016-02-04 2016-12-21 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Strengthen the method for Reliability of Wireless Communication, subscriber equipment, base station and system
CN109565840A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-04-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Sounding reference signal transmission enhancement method, terminal device and the network equipment

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8848520B2 (en) * 2010-02-10 2014-09-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Aperiodic sounding reference signal transmission method and apparatus
CN109587809B (en) * 2014-03-27 2021-11-12 海德威无线科技有限公司 Method and device for aperiodic SRS
CN108282285B (en) * 2017-01-05 2020-06-02 华为技术有限公司 Signal transmission method and device
KR102365905B1 (en) * 2017-05-04 2022-02-21 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 Method for determining transmission parameters of uplink signals, terminals and network devices
WO2019061367A1 (en) * 2017-09-29 2019-04-04 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method, terminal device and network device
US10952231B2 (en) * 2018-05-10 2021-03-16 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for beam indication for uplink transmission in a wireless communication system
EP3841698B1 (en) * 2018-08-20 2022-11-16 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Low overhead aperiodic triggering of multi-symbol srs
CN113169848B (en) * 2019-03-21 2023-04-07 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication method, terminal equipment and network equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105122679A (en) * 2013-04-15 2015-12-02 Lg电子株式会社 Methods and devices for transmitting sounding reference signal in wireless access system
WO2016163805A1 (en) * 2015-04-10 2016-10-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for controlling transmission of sounding reference signal in wireless access system supporting machine type communication
CN106255209A (en) * 2016-02-04 2016-12-21 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Strengthen the method for Reliability of Wireless Communication, subscriber equipment, base station and system
CN109565840A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-04-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Sounding reference signal transmission enhancement method, terminal device and the network equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115804204A (en) 2023-03-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11569949B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
US20210084687A1 (en) Random Access Resource Configuration Method and Communications Device
WO2021062973A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
US11632206B2 (en) Method and apparatus for obtaining resource indication value
WO2018210243A1 (en) Communication method and device
US20210160852A1 (en) Resource configuration method and terminal device
CN109152029B (en) Communication method, network equipment and user equipment
KR102354668B1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting downlink control information, and method and apparatus for obtaining the number of blind detections
CN113711669A (en) Resource allocation method and device
US20240030964A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
KR20220050157A (en) Resource multiplexing method and device
JP2023512807A (en) Method and apparatus for supporting reduced capacity devices in wireless communications
TW202019215A (en) Carrier processing method, terminal, network device and storage medium
CN111034242B (en) Method and device for sending cell configuration information
WO2022061733A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022061777A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022061735A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2023050260A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2022036719A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
WO2024148609A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus, terminal device, and network device
WO2022156436A1 (en) Identification method and device for terminal
WO2023065365A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024011632A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2023030205A1 (en) Resource indication method and communication apparatus
WO2022082684A1 (en) Control information transmission method, device, and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20954585

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20954585

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1